PAGE 1

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Chapter 1

1.1 Data representation

Have Revised
Have Read
To Revise

Prepared
S No Learning Outcome

To Read
1.1.1: Binary systems
1 Recognize the use of binary numbers in computer systems
2 Denary-to-binary and binary-to- denary conversion
3 Concept of a byte and how the byte is used to measure memory size
Use binary in computer registers for a given application (such as in
4
robotics, digital instruments and counting systems)
1.1.2: Hexadecimal
5 Represent integers as hexadecimal numbers
6 Reasons for choosing hexadecimal to represent numbers
7 Convert positive hexadecimal integers to and from denary
8 Convert positive hexadecimal integers to and from binary
9 Represent numbers stored in registers and main memory as hexadecimal
Identify current uses of hexadecimal numbers in computing, such as
defining colours in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), Media Access
10
Control (MAC) addresses, assembly languages and machine code,
debugging
1.1.3: Data storage
43 File formats sound (music), pictures, video, text and numbers
Identify and describe methods of error detection and correction, such as
44 parity checks, check digits, checksums and Automatic Repeat requests
(ARQ)
45 Concept of (MIDI) files, jpeg files, MP3 and MP4 files
File compression (lossless and lossy compression algorithms) applied to
46
music/video, photos and text files

Chapter at a glance:

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 2

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Computer is an electronic data processing machine, accepts data, processes according to given
instruction and produces resulting information.
Data is set of raw facts and figures required to solve a problem.
Analogue Data consists on continuous values, found in our daily life. E.g. Weight, Temperature
etc.
Digital Data consists of two discrete values like 0 and 1, used in internal circuitry of computer.
The basic building block in all computers is the binary number system.
A binary digit is commonly referred to as a BIT; 8 bits are usually referred to as a BYTE.
The byte is the smallest unit of memory in a computer.
Binary-to-Decimal & Denary-to-Binary Conversion –use binary notation (place values) i.e. 128,
64, 32, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1.
For Binary-to-Hexadecimal conversion firstly groups of 4 bits are made from right to left and each
group is converted separately using 8, 4, 2, 1 notation.
For Hexadecimal-to-Binary conversion each hex digit is separated by other and then each hex
digit is converted separately using 8 4 2 1 notation.
For Denary-to-Hexadecimal conversion LCM of the denary number is taken.
For Hexadecimal-to-Denary conversion hexadecimal notation (place value) is used e.g. 4096
256 16 1
Memory Dump is display of memory contents and address in hexadecimal on screen or printed
on paper. It is powerful fault-tracing tool for expert programmers.
Hexadecimal are used in HTML to represent colour codes (RGB Model). For example: # ff0000
for bright red and #980000 for darker red.
MAC Addresses are unique number of NIC (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth. or wired connection i.e. Ethernet).
They are 48 bit long, but converted into 12 hexadecimal digits (in 6 pairs) making them short and
easier to understand. For 00-1C-2A-FF-01. 1st 3 pairs represent manufacturer while the other
represent serial number of product.
UAA (Universally Administered MAC Address) are most common. These are the MAC
addresses set by manufacturer
LAA (Locally Administered MAC Addresses) are changed locally to bypass firewall, or to assign
MAC address of specific format.
URL encoding: Web addresses can be written using hexadecimal rather than denary.
Hexadecimal codes are preceded by a % sign. For example, the word“www.ruknuddin.com” is
written as:%72%75%6B%6E%75%64%64%69%6E
Machine code and Assembly code are examples of low-level languages and are used by
software developers when producing, for example, computer games. They look difficult but they
have many advantages at the development stage of software writing (especially when trying to
locate errors in the code). Using hexadecimal makes it much easier, faster and less error prone to
write code compared to binary.
Character: Any text, number or symbol.
Compression: The method of reducing file size.
Lossy Compression: The file is reduced in size for transmission and storage; by permanently
removing some redundant information from the file
Lossless Compression: The file is reduced in size for transmission and storage; it is then put
back together again later producing a file identical to the original
MP3: File compression system for music which does not noticeably affect the quality of the sound.
This is done using file compression algorithms which use PERCEPTUAL MUSIC SHAPING; this

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 3

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

essentially removes sounds that the human ear can’t hear properly and background noise.
JPEG: File compression format designed to make photo files smaller in size for storage and for
transmission.
MIDI: Standard adopted by the electronic music industry for controlling devices such as
synthesisers and sound cards
MP4: MPEG-4 (MP4) format allows the storage of multimedia files rather than just sound. Music,
videos, photos and animation can all be stored in the MP4 format. Videos, for example, could be
streamed over the internet using the MP4 format.
Algorithm: step-by-step set of instruction to solve a problem.
Register: Immediate access store in the processor. It can store small piece of data.

Some of the number systems, those are studied in A Level Computer Science are:
i) Denary (Decimal) number system
ii) Binary number system
iii) Hexadecimal number system
Denary (Decimal) Number System:-
“The number system which is based on 10 characters from 0 to 9 is called denary (decimal)
system.”
It is the most common number system. The digits of decimal system are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
8, and 9. The value of each digit in a figure depends upon its weight. The weights are based on
power of 10.

Binary Number System:

In computer data is stored in the form of electric charge ON and OFF,
represented by 1s and 0s. These “1’s” and “0’s” are called bit (being a
contraction of BInary digiT), and 8 bits make a byte to represent a single
character.

Binary numbers are fundamental to the way that all modern computers work. They are used to
represent any data stored within a computer system.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 4

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


1.1.2 Hexadecimal Number System:-
“The number system which is based on 16 characters from 0 to 9
and A, B, C, D, E & F is called Hexadecimal system.”
Benefits of Hexadecimal Numbers:
x Easier to convert long binary numbers into hexadecimals than
into denary.
x Easier to read and understand
x Make it less prone to error

Uses of Hexadecimal System:

Uses of Hexadecimal in HTML:
Hyper Text Mark-up Language is used to develop Websites. In HTML a colour is specified according
to the intensity of its Red, Green and Blue (RGB) components, each represented by eight bits. Thus,
there are 24 bits used to specify a web colour, and 16,777,216 colours that may be so specified. It's
easier for the human programmer to represent a 24-bit integer, often used for 32-bit colour values,
as #FF0099 instead of 111111110000000010011001

BINARY (BITS) HEX

1 1 1 1 = F
RR
1 1 1 1 = F
0 0 0 0 = 0
GG
0 0 0 0 = 0
1 0 0 1 = 9
BB
1 0 0 0 = 8
111111110000000010011001 FF0099

HTML TAG Name

<font color="#FF0000">RED</font> (RED)
<font color="#00FF00">GREEN</font> (GREEN) LIME
<font color="#0000FF">BLUE</font> (BLUE)
<font color="#FFFF00">YELLOW</font> (YELLOW)
<font color="#FF00FF">MAGENTA</font> (MAGENTA) FUCHSIA
<font color="#00FFFF">CYAN</font> (CYAN) AQUA

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 5

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Uses of Hexadecimal in MAC Address:
MAC address is unique identification number of NIC (network interface card). It is 48 bits long, so
281 billion MAC addresses can be assigned computers.
MAC addresses are 48 bit long so they are very difficult to read, write and understand for example
0000 0000 0001 1100 1011 0011 0100 1111 0010 0101. To make them shorter and easy to
understand they are shown in 12 hexadecimal digits in 6 groups, like 00 – 1C – B3 – 4F – 25 – FE.
First 6 numbers (i.e. 00-1C-B3) are manufacturer identity while last 6 numbers (i.e. 4F-25-FE) are
serial number of NIC.
There are two types of MAC address:
UAA (Universally administered MAC address) are the most common MAC address set by
manufacturers. These are not changed.
LAA(Locally administered MAC address): These are changed locally, but they must be unique.

There are a few reasons why the MAC address needs to be changed using LAA:
x Certain software used on mainframe systems needs all the MAC addresses of devices to
fall into a strict format; because of this, it may be necessary to change the MAC address of
some devices to ensure they follow the correct format.
x It may be necessary to bypass a MAC address filter on a router or a firewall; only 24 MAC
addresses with a certain format are allowed through, otherwise the devices will be blocked.
x To get past certain types of network restrictions it may be necessary to emulate unrestricted
MAC addresses; hence it may require the MAC address to be changed on certain devices
connected to the network.
Uses of Hexadecimal in Debugging:
Debugging allows programmers to detect, diagnose, and eliminate errors in a program. The source
debugger uses the hexadecimal values of the characters. Hex is often used in error messages. The
hex number refers to the memory location of the error. This helps programmers to find and then fix
problems.
Memory Dump
Contents of memory are in binary numbers. Binary numbers are
long and difficult to understand.
Memory dump is a hexadecimal view (on screen or paper) of
computer data, from RAM or from a file or storage device. As
memory dump uses hexadecimal number to show memory
contents, it become a powerful fault tracing tool but requires
expertise in computer architecture.
Uses of Hexadecimal in Assembly Language:
Machine codes are written in binary language which is very long and difficult to understand.
Hexadecimal numbers are easier, faster and less error prone to write code.
In assembly language codes are written in hexadecimal. This can have many advantages to
program developers or when carrying out troubleshooting.
For example:
LDD A750 (assemble language)
A5E4 FFA4 (machine code using hexadecimal values)
1010 0101 1110 0100 1111 1111 1010 0100 (machine code using binary)

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 6

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Memory Size Measurement
It should be pointed out here that there is some confusion in the naming of memory sizes.
There are two different methods:
a) Denary Prefix System used in SI Units. It is base 10 system. In this system 103 = 1000
i.e. Kilo
b) Binary Prefix System used in IEC Units (International Elcrtro-Technical
Commission). It is a base 2 system. In this system 210=1024 i.e. kibi
c) 0 or 1 = 1 bit
d) 4 bits = 1 nibble
e) 8 bits = 2 niblles = 1 byte

SI Units IEC units

1 kilobyte = 103= 1000 byte 1 kibibyte (1 KiB) = 210= 1024 bytes
1 megabyte = 106=1000000 bytes 1 mebibyte (1 MiB) = 220= 1048576 bytes
1 gigabyte = 109=1000000000 bytes 1 gibibyte (1 GiB) =230= 1073741824 bytes
1 terabyte = 1012=1000000000000 bytes 1 tebibyte (1 TiB) =240= 1099511627776 bytes
and so on. and so on

Representation of Text and Numbers in Computer

Text and numbers can be represented in computer as patterns of binary digits. To represent each
character (letter, digit or symbol) a character set is used. Character set is a set of characters can be
understood by computer.
ASCII and Unicode are important character sets that are used as standard.
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange)
The ASCII character set is a 7-bit set of codes that allows 128 different characters. That is enough
for every upper-case letter, lower-case letter, digit and punctuation mark on most keyboards. ASCII
is only used for the English language.
Extended ASCII
Extended ASCII code is an 8-bit character set that represents 256 different characters, making it
possible to use characters such as é or ©. Extended ASCII is useful for European languages.
Unicode
Unicode uses between 8 and 32 bits per character, so it can represent any characters from
languages from all around the world. It is commonly used across the internet. As it is larger than
ASCII, it might take up more storage space when saving documents.
Global companies, like Facebook and Google, would not use the ASCII character set because their
users communicate in many different languages.
How text is encoded in computer
Each character in text has a unique binary code in ASCII, Extended ASCII and Unicode character
set. To encode a text each character is replaced with the binary value given in
ASCII/Extended/Unicode and stored in sequence.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 7

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Representation of Sound Files
Sampling: A sound wave is broken down into smaller pieces at a regular interval of time. These
smaller pieces are known as Sample and this process is known as Sampling. In sampling
amplitude of sound wave is taken at different intervals of time.
Sampling resolution – number of bits used to represent sound amplitude (also known as bit
depth).
Sampling rate – number of sound samples taken per second.
Sound is a vibration that propagates as an acoustic wave, through a transmission medium such
as a gas, liquid or solid.
A sound waves are longitudinal as they consist of alternating compressions and rarefactions, or
regions of high pressure and low pressure, moving at a certain speed. The longitudinal sound
waves are converted into transverse waves.
How to capture sound:
To record a sound microphone is used.
Microphone has a diaphragm. Diaphragm is attached with a moveable coil. Inside this movable coil
there is fixed magnet.
When sound waves strike diaphragm, causes vibration in it and the movable coil starts moving to a
nd fro around fixed magnet. This movement generates electrical signals. And in this way sound is c
aptured.

Conversion of Analogue Sound into Digital Format:

Sound waves are analogue values, these analogue values are converted into digital values to
manipulate and to store in computer.
ADC (Analogue to Digital Converter) is used to convert analogue sound waves into digital values.
This conversion is done in following steps.
a) Firstly, a filter removes non-audible sound waves. Humans can hear sounds in
a frequency range from about 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
b) Then sound waves are sampled at a given time rate (Sound waves are broken down
thousands of smaller parts (samples) per second.)

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 8

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


c) The height/amplitude of each sound wave is determined.
d) Approximation is used when necessary.
e) At last sound wave values are stored in binary digits, depending upon number of bits per
sample.

Digital audio quality

Factors that affect the quality of digital audio include:
a) Sample rate - The sample rate is how many samples, or measurements, of the sound are
taken each second. The more samples that are taken, the more detail about where the waves
rise and fall is recorded and the higher the quality of the audio. Also, the shape of the sound
wave is captured more accurately. Each sample represents the amplitude of the digital signal at
a specific point in time.
b) Bit depth/Sampling Resolution Bit depth is the number of bits available for each sample. The
higher the bit depth, the higher the quality of the audio. Bit depth is usually 16 bits on a CD and
24 bits on a DVD. A bit depth of 16 has a resolution of 65,536 possible values (ranging from 0 to
65,535), and a bit depth of 24 has over 16 million possible values (ranging from 0 to 16,777,
216).
Benefits of Higher Bit Depth:
The higher the bit depth, the higher the quality of the audio.
Allows for larger dynamic ranges (dynamic range is approximately six times the bit depth).
More accurate representation/crisper sound quality.
Increase in bit depth decreases the quantisation error.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 9

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Drawback of Higher Bit Depth:
Increasing bit depth also increases files size.
More disc and memory space is required.
Data will be transmitted slowly
Greater processing power will be required.
c) Bit rate - The bit rate of a file tells us how many bits of data are processed every second. Bit
rates are usually measured in kilobits per second (kbps).
A common audio sample rate for music is 44,100 samples per second. The unit for the sample
rate is hertz (Hz). 44,100 samples per second is 44,100 hertz or 44.1 kilohertz (kHz).
Telephone networks and VOIP services can use a sample rate as low as 8 kHz. This uses less
data to represent the audio. At 8 kHz, the human voice can still be heard clearly - but music at this
sample rate would sound low quality.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 10

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

MIDI
Pronounced middy, an acronym for musical instrument digital
interface, a standard adopted by the electronic music industry
for controlling devices, such as synthesizers and sound cards,
which emit music.
A MIDI file consists of a list of commands that instruct a device
like an electronic organ, how to produce a particular sound or musical note.
Examples of MIDI commands include:
¾ note on/off: this indicates that a key has been pressed/released to produce/stop producing a
musical note
¾ key pressure: this indicates how hard the key has been pressed (this could indicate loudness
of the music note or whether any vibrato has been used, and so on).
The whole piece of music will have been stored as a series of commands but no actual musical
notes. Their size, compared with an MP3 file, is considerably smaller. MIDI is essentially a
communications protocol that allows electronic musical instruments to interact with each other.
The MIDI protocol uses 8-bit serial transmission with one start bit and one stop bit, and is therefore
asynchronous.

MIDI is essentially a communications protocol that allows electronic musical instruments to interact
with each other.
Two additional bytes are required, a PITCH BYTE for note to play, and a VELOCITY BYTE for
loudness. However, to play back through an instrument such as
a guitar would need the use of SEQUENCER SOFTWARE.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 11

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


MP3 (Moving Pictures Expert Group Audio Layer 3)
This has become the standard for distributing digital music files on the internet. It uses lossy
compression to reduce file sizes to about a tenth of the original.
The compression algorithm is intended to remove sounds that are generally beyond the limits of
most people’s hearing and does not noticeably affect the quality of sound.
When using MP3 format, the size of the music track will be reduced by a factor of 10 (i.e. the size is
reduced by 90% and remaining file size is only 10% of original size).This is done using file
compression algorithms which use PERCEPTUAL MUSIC SHAPING; this essentially removes

For example, an 50 megabyte music CD can be reduced to 5 megabytes.

50 MB x 90/100= 45 MB reduced. 50 MB x 10/100=5 MB new file size.
sounds that the human ear can’t hear properly.
The quality of MP3 files depends on the BIT RATE – this is the number of bits per second used
when creating the file. Bit rates are roughly between 80 and 320 kilobits per second; usually 200
or higher gives a sound quality close to a normal CD.

MPEG-4 (MP4) files are slightly different to MP3 files. This format allows the storage of multimedia
files rather than just sound. Music, videos, photos and animation can all be stored in the MP4
format. Videos, for example, could be streamed over the internet using the MP4 format without
losing any real discernible quality.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 12

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Bitmap Images
Bit-map image – system that uses pixels to make up an image.
Pixel – smallest picture element that makes up an image.

Bit depth – number of bits used to represent the smallest unit in, for example, a sound or image file – the
larger the bit depth, the better the quality of the sound or colour image.
Colour depth – number of colours available in a pixel, e.g. 8 bit depth has colour depth of 256 (28 = 256).
Colour Depth Available Colours
Bit Depth
Available colours
1-bit 21 = 2 Monochrome ( Black & White)
2-bit 22 = 4 Grey Scale
3-bit 23 = 8 RGB 8 Colours
7-bit 27 = 128 128 Colours
8-bit= 1 byte 28 = 256 256 Colour
24-bit= 3 byte 224 = 16,777,216 True colours 16,777,216 Colours

Image resolution – number of pixels that make up an image, for example, an image could contain 4096 ×
3192 pixels (12 738 656 pixels in total).
Screen resolution – number of horizontal and vertical pixels that make up a screen display. If the screen
resolution is smaller than the image resolution, the whole image cannot be shown on the screen, or the
original image will become lower quality.
Resolution – number of pixels per column and per row on a monitor or television screen.
Pixel density – number of pixels per square centimetre.

Vector graphics – images that use 2D points to describe lines and curves and their properties that are
grouped to form geometric shapes.
How images are stored in computer:

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 13

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

The images are stored in computer as bitmaps
Each image is made up of tiny elements known as Pixel (Picture Element)
Each pixel is of a single colour. The number of available colours in a pixel is known as Colour
Depth.
The Colour depth of the image is determined by Bit Depth i.e. number of bits per pixel
The image quality is also determined by Pixel Density i.e. number of pixels per inch.
The total number of pixels in an image is known as Image Resolution.
The values of each pixel of the image is stored in binary numbers.

JPG or JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

PEG is the file compression format designed to make photo files smaller in size for storage and for
transmission. It uses lossy compression and compresses a file between factor of 5 to 15.
Image File Size Calculation
To calculate image file size, firstly number of
pixels found out then these are multiplied to find
total number of pixels in an image that gives,
image resolution.
For example 2000 pixels wide and 2000 pixels
high image will have 2000 × 2000= 4,000,000
Uncompressed raw pixels. This is often referred to as a 4-megapixel image.
image Then Image resolution is multiplied by bit depth.

Black & White image Grey Scale 8-Colour True Colour

Bit Depth=1 Bit Depth=2 Bit Depth= 3 Bit Depth=24
Image Size Image Size Image Size Image Size
= 4,000,000 x 1 bit = 4,000,000 x 2 bit = 4,000,000 x 3 bit = 4,000,000 x 24 bit
= 4,000,000 bit = 8,000,000 bit = 12,000,000 bit = 4,000,000 x 3 Byte
= 4,000,000 / 8 Byte = 8,000,000 / 8 Byte = 12,000,000 / 8 Byte = 12,000,000 Byte
= 500,000 Bytes = 1,000,000 Bytes = 1,500,000 Bytes = 12 MB
= 500 KB = 1 MB = 1.5 MB
Image Size = 500 KB Image Size = 1 MB Image Size = 1.5 MB Image Size = 12MB

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 14

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


File Compression
Compression is a useful tool for reducing file sizes. When images, sounds or videos are
compressed, data is removed to reduce the file size.
Advantage of File Compression
a) Compressed file occupies lesser storage space
b) Compressed file occupies lesser space in memory
c) File can be uploaded and download quickly
d) Lesser internet data is used in transmission of compressed file.
This is very helpful when streaming and downloading files.
Streamed music and downloadable files, such as MP3s, are usually between 128 kbps and 320
kbps - much lower than the 1,411 kbps of an uncompressed file.
Videos are also compressed when they are streamed over a network. Streaming HD video
requires a high-speed internet connection. Without it, the user would experience buffering and
regular drops in quality. HD video is usually around 3 mbps. SD is around 1,500 kbps.
Lossy and lossless compression
Compression can be lossy or lossless.
Lossless compression means that as the file size is compressed but data is restored back to its
original state on uncompressing. Run Length Encoding is a method of lossless file compression.
Lossless compression is mostly used for documents and software, sometime images and audio
are also compressed using lossless compression.
Lossless compression can compress up-to 50%
Lossy compression permanently removes data. For example, an image file compressed to
jpeg using factor of 5 to 15 while an audio WAV file compressed to an MP3 (90% reduction in file
size). Lossy file compression is mostly used for images, audio and video files.
Text file compression
Text and numbers are usually stored in an ASCII format. Text files are also compressed. Lossless
compression method is used for text and numbers.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 15

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

Algorithm 1:
These use complex algorithms that work on redundancy or repeated sections of words (e.g. OU in
yOUr, cOUntry or mOUntain).

THIS Repeated words, such as 1 SECTION

‘THIS’ could be put into a
SECTION data dictionary and be S2S Y3 2 1
SHOWS YOU replaced by ‘1’. Repeated W3LD WORK
word sections, such as
HOW THIS ‘HOW’ and ‘OU’ could be
WOULD replaced by the numbers ‘2’
and ‘3’. Our phrase then
WORK’ becomes

THIS 1
HOW 2
OU 3
Text compression typically works by finding similar strings within a text file, and replacing those
strings with a temporary binary representation to make the overall file size smaller. Computers can
compress text by finding repeated sequences and replacing them with shorter representations, a
character that isn't part of the original text.
For example a quote having 84 characters “Think left and think right and think low and think high.
Oh, the thinks you can think up if only you try!"

The computer also needs to store the table of replacements that it made, so that it can reconstruct
the original.
Replacement original
$ think
& and
# you

The repeated words replaced with the character and the compressed file has 50 characters. The
compressed file is “$ left & $ right & $ low & $ high. Oh, the $s # can $ up if only # try!"
Text is compressed using Run Length Encoding method also.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 16

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Algorithm 2: Run length encoding (RLE) on text data
One of the simplest examples of compression is RLE.
RLE is a basic form of data compression that converts consecutive identical values into a code
consisting of the character and the number marking the length of the run.
The more similar values there are, the more values can be compressed.
The sequence of data is stored as count and a single value.
For example to compress a text string “aaaabbbbcccccccddddd” as “4a4b7c5d”

Image File Compression

Images are all around us, from application icons to animated GIFs to photos. Image files can take
up a lot of space, so computers employ a range of algorithms to compress image files.
Lossy File Compression for Images
For lossy file compression of image file following steps are taken:
a) A lossy file compression algorithm is used
b) Bit Depth (bits per pixel) is reduced resulting in reduction in colour depth (number of
available colour) as well as file size (lesser number of bits lesser file size)
c) Pixel density (pixel per inch) is decreased resulting decrease in image resolution it too
reduce file size (lesser pixel lesser bits means lesser file size).
d) Reducing bit depth and pixel density reduces the file size but the removed data cannot be
put back so original image cannot be recreated.
Lossless File Compression of Images
One of the simplest examples of lossless compression is RLE. To perform lossless compression
of image following steps are taken:
e) A lossless file compression algorithm RLE is used
f) Consecutive pattern on images are identified.
g) Consecutive identical pattern values converted into a code consisting of the image pattern
and the number marking the length of the run.
h) The more similar values there are, the more values can be compressed.
i) The sequence of data is stored as a single value and count.
For example a Here's a simple image, a 16x11 black cup saucer icon with white background.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 17

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



In run-length encoding, the computer replaces each row with numbers that say how many
consecutive pixels are the same color, For example, 4 white pixels, 10 black pixels, and then 2 white
pixels:
1111 0000 0000 0011 or WWWW BBBB BBBB BBWW
This would be represented after Run Length Encoding as follows:4 1 10 0 2 1 or 4W 10B 2W

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 18

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Audio File Compression
Lossy File Compression of Audio using MP3:
This has become the standard for distributing digital music files on the internet. To perform lossy
file compression on audio file following steps are take:
a) Lossy file compression algorithm is used
b) Perceptual Music Shaping algorithm is the lossy file compression for audio file
c) It removes the background noise.
d) It removes sounds that are generally beyond the limits of most people’s hearing and does
not noticeably affect the quality of sound.
e) When using MP3 format, the size of the music track will be reduced by a factor of 10 (i.e.
the size is reduced by 90% and remaining file size is only 10% of original size).
f) The quality of MP3 files depends on the BIT RATE – this is the number of bits per second
used when creating the file. Bit rates are roughly between 80 and 320 kilobits per second;
usually 200 or higher gives a sound quality close to a normal CD.

For example, an 50 megabyte music CD can be reduced to 5 megabytes.

50 MB x 90/100= 45 MB reduced. 50 MB x 10/100=5 MB new file size.

Lossless File Compression of Audio File

For lossless file compression of audio file following steps are taken:
j) A lossless file compression algorithm RLE is used
k) Consecutive sound patterns are identified.
l) Consecutive identical sound pattern values are converted into a code consisting of the
sound pattern and the number marking the length of the run.
m) The more similar values there are, the more values can be compressed.
n) The sequence of data is stored as a single value and count.
Video File Compression
x A compression algorithm is used
x Redundant data is removed
x Reduce colour depth
x Reduce image resolution
x Reduce sample rate
x Reduce sample resolution
x Reduce frame rate
x Use perceptual music shaping
x Data is permanently removed
Topical Past Paper Questions


+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 19

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


D6XPPHU3
1 Benedict has a computer that is assigned an Internet Protocol (IP) address. The IP address is:
198.167.214.0
The IP address is represented as denary values.
(a) Convert the denary values 167 and 214 from the IP address to 8-bit binary.
167

214
Working space
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Benedict’s computer is also assigned a Media Access Control (MAC) address.
(i) Identify one similarity between an IP address and a MAC address.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify two differences between an IP address and a MAC address.
Difference 1 .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Difference 2 .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 20

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



E6XPPHU3
1 A denary value can be converted into hexadecimal and binary. [6]
(a) Complete the table to show the hexadecimal and 8-bit binary values of the given denary values.
Denary Hexadecimal 8-bit binary
49
123
200
Working space
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give two benefits, to users, of converting binary values to hexadecimal.
Benefit 1 ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Benefit 2 ....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 21

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(c) Hexadecimal is used to represent Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) colour codes in
computer science.
Identify three other ways that hexadecimal is used in computer science.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................ [3]


 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 22

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


F6XPPHU3
1 Greta has a computer that she uses for schoolwork and leisure.
(a) The computer has the Media Access Control (MAC) address:
00:A0:C9:14:C8:29
(i) Tick (‫ )ض‬to show whether the MAC address is initially assigned to the computer by the network,
the manufacturer or the user. [1]
Tick (‫)ض‬
Network
Manufacturer
User
(ii) The values in the MAC address are hexadecimal values.
Convert the three given hexadecimal values into 8-bit binary.
14 ......................................................................................................................................
A0 ......................................................................................................................................
C9 ...................................................................................................................................... [3]
Working space
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(iii) Convert the two given hexadecimal values into denary.
29 ......................................................................................................................................
C8 ...................................................................................................................................... [2]
Working space
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................

Answers:
1 (a) (i) Manufacturer
1 (a) (ii) 00010100
10100000
11001001
1 (a) (iii) 41
200

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 23

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


2 Jolene displays videos on her website. She uses lossy compression to reduce the file size of the
videos.
(a) Describe how lossy compression reduces the file size of the videos.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) State two reasons why Jolene would use lossy rather than lossless compression for the videos.
Reason 1 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ..................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 24

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2
8 An alarm clock is controlled by a microprocessor. It uses the 24 hour clock. The hour is
represented by an 8-bit register, A, and the number of minutes is represented by another 8-bit
register, B.
(a) Identify what time is represented by the following two 8-bit registers.

Hours ............................................ Minutes ......................................... [2]

(b) An alarm has been set for 07:30. Two 8-bit registers, C and D, are used to represent the hours
and minutes of the alarm time.
Show how 07:30 would be represented by these two registers:

Hours Minutes [2]

(c) Describe how the microprocessor can determine when to sound the clock alarm.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................[3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 25

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


9 Draw a line to connect each question to the correct answer. [5]

ExaminerĜs Comments on Question 9

The full range of marks was awarded for this question. Many candidates gained full marks. The most common errors were
miscalculations for 30, 19 and 12.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 26

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2
10 Letters from the alphabet are represented in a computer by the following denary (base 10) values:
a = 97
g = 103
i = 105
l = 108
n = 110
The word “A L I G N” is stored as: 97 108 105 103 110

(a) Convert each of the five values to binary. The first one has been done for you. [2]
Letter Binary value
a (97): 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
l(108):
i (105):
g (103):
n (110):

(b) An encryption system works by shifting the binary value for a letter one place to the left. “a” then
becomes:

This binary value is then converted to hexadecimal; the hexadecimal value for “a” will be:
C2
For the two letters “L” and “G”, shift the binary values one place to the left and convert these values into
hexadecimal: [4]

ExaminerĜs comments onQuestions 10(a) and 10(b)

Many candidates showed some knowledge of binary conversion in part (a) and could correctly convert the values. Some
candidates showed little knowledge and gave a random and incorrect response as a result.
In part (b) many candidates were able to correctly carry out the bit shift then covert the value to hex. Some candidates gained
marks for a correct bit shift but were unable to demonstrate the knowledge to convert the values to hex so gained two marks.
Candidates were awarded follow through marks if they had calculated the values incorrectly in part (a) for both their bit shift and
the hex conversion.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 27

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3 9KPVGT2
2 Seven computer terms and seven descriptions are shown below.
Draw a line to link each computer term to its most appropriate description.

Reduction of file size by permanently

Interface removing some redundant information from
the file

File compression system for music which

JPEG does not noticeably affect the quality of the
sound

Hardware component that allows the user to

Lossless communicate with a computer or operating
compression system

The file is reduced in size for transmission and

Lossy storage; it is then put back together again later
compression producing a file identical to the original

File compression format designed to make

MIDI photo files smaller in size for storage and for
transmission

Standard adopted by the electronic music

MP3 format industry for controlling devices such as
synthesisers and sound cards

4 (a) (i) Convert the following two hexadecimal numbers into binary:

[4]
(ii) Now perform the AND (logic) operation on each corresponding pair of binary bits in the two
numbers from part (i).

[2]
(iii) Convert your answer in part (ii) into hexadecimal.
........................................................................................................................................... [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 28

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) (i) The following code shows HTML ‘tag’ pairs on either side of the text stating the colour that
each creates.
<font color “ # F F 0 0 0 0 “ > RED </font>
<font color “ # 0 0 F F 0 0 “ > GREEN </font>
<font color “ # 0 0 0 0 F F “ > BLUE </font>
<font color “ # X “ > YELLOW </font>
<font color “ # Y “ > MAGENTA </font>
<font color “ # Z “ > CYAN </font>
Yellow is a combination of red and green, magenta a combination of red and blue and cyan a
combination of green and blue.
State what 6-digit hexadecimal values should replace X, Y and Z in the above code.
X ........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
Z .....................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Describe how other colours, such as a darker shade of blue, are created.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) 1A – 16 – C5 – 22 – FF – FF is an example of a MAC address.
(i) Identify what the first six and last six hexadecimal digits represent.
First six digits ....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Last six digits .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State why MAC addresses are used.
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 29

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2
2 (b) The information from seven sensors is sent to an engine management system in the car. The
status of each sensor is stored in an 8-bit register; a value of 1 indicates a fault condition

For example, a register showing 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 indicates:

• temperature too high
• fuel pressure too low
• voltage too low
(i) Identify the fault condition(s) that the following register indicates:

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The system uses odd parity.
Write the correct parity bit in each register.

[2]

(iii) A car has a faulty airbag and the CO level is too high.
Write what should be contained in the 8-bit register.

(iv) Give the hexadecimal value of the binary number shown in part (iii).
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
9 MP3 file compression reduces the size of a music file by 90%.
(a) A music track is 80 MB in size.
Calculate the file size after compression.
............................................................................................................................................
How many MP3 files of the size calculated above could be stored on an 800 MB CD?
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 30

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) (i) Explain how MP3 files retain most of the original music quality.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the type of file compression used in MP3 files.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name another file compression format.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

3 9KPVGT2
2 (a) Convert the hexadecimal number B5 into binary:
...........................................................................................................................................
Convert the binary number 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 into hexadecimal:
........................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Give two examples where hexadecimal numbers are used in computer science.
1: .........................................................................................................................................
2: ...............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State two benefits of using hexadecimal numbers in computer science.
1: .........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2:.......................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................[2]
7 (a) Describe what is meant by lossy and lossless compression when applied to files.
Lossy: .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................
Lossless: ............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Name and describe one type of file that uses lossy compression.
Name: .................................................................................................................................
Description: .........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................[2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 31

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(c) A company advertises its backup memory device as having 500 GB of storage.
A customer wishes to know how many 8 MB files could be stored on the device.
The company claimed that up to 62 500 files (assuming each file is 8 MB) could be stored.
The customer calculated that 64 000 files could be stored.
Explain the difference between these two storage values. Show any calculations you use in your
explanation.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
10 Characters can be represented in a computer by a numerical code.
The following list shows 16 characters with their numerical codes in denary:
a = 97 d = 100 h = 104 m = 109 t = 116
b = 98 e = 101 i = 105 o = 111 u = 117
c = 99 g = 103 k = 107 r = 114 w = 119
. = 46 (code for the full stop)
Web addresses can be written using hexadecimal rather than denary. Hexadecimal codes are
preceded by a % sign. For example, the word “c a g e” is written as:
either 99 97 103 101 (in denary)
or %63 %61 %67 %65 (in hexadecimal)
(a) Complete the conversion of the following web address into hexadecimal: [3]
w w W . C i e . o r g . u K
%77 %77 %77
b) Complete the web address from the given hexadecimal codes: [3]
%77 %77 %77 %2E %72 %6F %63 %6B %69 %63 %74 %2E %63 %6F %6D

w w W
3 9KPVGT2
5 A computer uses an 8-bit register.
The 8-bit register contains binary integers.
(a) Write the denary (base 10) value represented by:

128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 32

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) All the bits in the register are shifted one place to the right as shown below.

Write the denary number that is represented after this shift.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State the effect the shift to the right had on the original denary number from part (a).
............................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The original number in part (a) is shifted three places to the right.
(i) Show the new binary number: [1]

(ii) Write the equivalent denary number.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Describe the problems that could be caused if the original binary number in part (a) is shifted
five places to the right.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [2]

3 5WOOGT2
1 Jane answers an examination question about computers and data correctly.
Six different words or numbers have been removed from her answer.
Complete the sentences in Jane’s answer, using the list given. Not all items in the list need to be
used.
•2 • 10 • 16 • analogue • binary
• denary • digital • hexadecimal
As humans, we process …………………………………… data, but a computer cannot process this
type of data. For a computer to be able to process data it needs to be converted to
…………………………………… data.
As humans, we mostly use a …………………………………… number system; this is a base
…………………………………… number system.
Computers use a …………………………………… number system; this is a base
…………………………………… number system. [6]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 33

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


2 Dheeraj identifies three hexadecimal numbers.
Write the denary number for each of the three hexadecimal numbers:
2A ....................................................................................................
101 ...................................................................................................
21E .................................................................................................. [3]

3 5WOOGT2
1 Different units of data can be used to represent the size of a file, as it changes in size.
Fill in the missing units of data, using the list given: [4]
Byte gigabyte (GB) megabyte (MB) nibble
Smallest Bit
……………………………………
……………………………………
Kilobyte (KB)
………………………………….
………………………………….
Largest Terabyte (TB)

3 5WOOGT2
1 Hexadecimal is used for MAC addresses.
Part of a MAC address is given:
97 – 5C – E1
Each pair of digits is stored as binary in an 8-bit register.
(a) Show what the binary register stores for each pair of the given digits. [6]
97

5C

E1
(b) Explain what is meant by a MAC address.
..........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 34

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(c) Give two other examples where hexadecimal can be used. [2]
5 The following text is stored as a text file:

She sells sea shells on the seashore. The shells that she sells are sea shells I am sure.
Explain how lossless compression would compress this file.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [5]
7 Annie writes a paragraph of text as an answer to an examination question about programming
languages. Using the list given, complete Annie’s answer by inserting the correct six missing
terms. Not all terms will be used.
• Assembly • Converter • Denary • Hexadecimal
• High-level language • Low-level language • Machine Code • Source Code
• Syntax • Translator
The structure of language statements in a computer program is called the ............................... . A
programming language that uses natural language statements is called a ………………… . When
programs are written in this type of language they need a ......................................................... to
convert them into ....................................................................... . A programming language that is
written using mnemonic codes is called ....................................................................... language.
this is an example of a ....................................................................... . [6]

3 9KPVGT2
1 (c) The library has a website that customers can use to search for a book.
(i) The website has a background colour with the hexadecimal colour code #F92A10The colour
code is stored in two 12-bit binary registers. [6]
Show how the colour code would be stored in the registers.
F92

A10

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 35

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(ii) Videos on the library website show customers which books the library will soon have in stock.
The library wants the file size of a video to be as small as possible.
Identify and describe a method the library could use to reduce the file size of a video as much as
possible.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [4]

Q 22) Winter 2019 P12

1 Computer memory size is measured in multiples of bytes.
Four statements about computer memory sizes are given in the table.

Tick (㾐) to show if the statement is True or False. [4]

Statement True (㾐) False (㾐)

25kB is larger than 100MB

999MB is larger than 50GB
3500kB is smaller than 2GB
2350bytes is smaller than 2kB
3 The data from a sensor must be converted from analogue to digital to be processed by a
computer.
(a) State what is meant by analogue data.
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State what is meant by digital data.
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
4 An 8-bit binary register contains the value:
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
(a) Convert the binary value to denary.
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 36

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) The contents of the register shifted one place to the right would give the result:
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
The contents of the register shown at the start of question 4 are shifted two places to the left.
Show the contents of the register after this shift has taken place. [1]

(c) State the effect this shift has on the denary value in part (a).
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
5 Audrey wants to send a sound file to Nico using email.
The file is too large to attach to an email so Audrey decides to compress the file.
She uses lossy compression to reduce the size of the sound file.
(a) Describe how lossy compression reduces the size of the sound file.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Nico asks Audrey why she used lossy compression rather than lossless.
(i) State one advantage Audrey could give of using lossy rather than lossless to compress the
sound file.
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one disadvantage Nico could give of using lossy rather than lossless to compress the
sound file.
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Audrey sometimes records MIDI files.
(i) Explain what is meant by a MIDI file.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................... [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 37

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2

1 (c) All smartphones have a MAC address.

(i) State what is meant by the term MAC address.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the structure of a MAC address.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

3 9KPVGT2

3 (a) Four denary to 8-bit binary conversions are given.

Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if each denary to 8-bit binary conversion is Correct or Incorrect. [4]

Denary Binary Conversion Correct (‫)ض‬ Incorrect (‫)ض‬

145 10010001
179 10110101
11 00010011
100 01100010
(b) Convert the 12-bit binary number into hexadecimal.

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

............................................................................................................................................. [3]
3 /CTEJ2
1 (b) Give the largest denary value that can be stored in the 8-bit binary register.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The hockey club wants to increase the number of people that can watch each match to 2000.
The 8-bit binary register may no longer be able to store the value.
Give the smallest number of bits that can be used to store the denary value 2000.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Working space
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 38

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Chapter 2

1.2 Communication and Internet Technologies

Have Revised
Have Read
To Revise

Prepared
S No Learning Outcome

To Read
1.2.1: Serial and parallel data transmission
1 Show understanding of what is meant by transmission of data
2 Distinguish between serial and parallel data transmission
3 Distinguish between simplex, duplex and half-duplex data transmission
4 Reasons for choosing serial or parallel data transmission
5 Show understanding of the need to check for errors
6 Explain how parity bits are used for error detection
Show understanding of the use of serial and parallel data transmission, in
7
Universal Serial Bus (USB) and Integrated Circuit (IC)
1.2.3: Internet principles of operation
8 Show understanding of the role of the browser and Internet server
9 What is meant by hypertext transfer protocol (http and https) and HTML
10 Distinguish between HTML structure and presentation
Show understanding of the concepts of MAC address, Internet Protocol (IP)
11
address, Uniform Resource Locator (URL) and cookies

Chapter at a glance:
A network is defined as a collection of computers and peripheral devices (such as printers)
connected together.
Generally, a network over short distances is called a local area network (LAN) while those over
great distances are wide area networks (WAN).
Network adapters: These adapters (also called network interface cards or NICs) connect
computers to a network so that they can communicate.
Network hubs and switches: Hubs and switches connect two or more computers to an Ethernet
network.
Routers connect computers and networks to each other (for example, a router can connect your
home network to the Internet).
Modem: Hardware device that converts signals from analogue to digital and vice versa; typically
used to convert signals sent over the public service telephone network.
Bit is short of binary digit. It is the smallest unit of data in computer. It consists of a 0 or an 1.
Bit rate is the rate of transmitting data
A web browser is software which allows a user to display a web page on their computer screen.
Web browsers interpret or translate the HTML code from websites and show the result of the
translation.
Simplex data transmission is sending data in one direction only (i.e. from sender to receiver)
Example: data being sent from a computer to a printer.
Half-duplex data transmission is sending data in both directions but only one at a time (i.e. data
can be sent from ‘A’ to ‘B’ or from ‘B’ to ‘A’ along the same line, but not at the same time).
Example: a walkie-talkie, fax machine.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 39

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Full-duplex data transmission is sending data in both directions simultaneously (i.e. data can be
sent from ‘A’ to ‘B’ and from ‘B’ to ‘A’ along the same line, both at the same time). Example: a
phone line.
Serial data transmission is when data is sent, one bit at a time, over a single wire or channel
Serial Transmission is transfer of data bit by bit using single wire (bits are sent one after the
other in a single stream).
Parallel Transmission is transfer of data in groups of bits using multiple wires.
The universal serial bus (USB)is an asynchronous serial data transmission method. It has quickly
become the standard method for transferring data between a computer and a number of devices.
Interference refers to disturbance that occurs in the signals when sending data that may corrupt
it.
ISP (Internet Service Provider): Company that provides individual’s access to the Internet and
other services such as webhosting and emails
IP Address: Location of a given computer/device on a network; can be a static or dynamic value
URL (Uniform Resource Locator): The standard format for referring to are source on the
Internet; also called Uniform Resource Indicator (URI); made up of:
●the protocol, e.g. http
●the domain name, e.g. ruknuddin.com
●the filename e.g. computer.html
HTML: Authoring language used to create documents on the World Wide Web; uses tags and
attributes
HTML Structure refers to contents of web pages.
HTML Presentationis format of webpage.
Cascade Style Sheet CSS is used to define presentation for web pages, including the design and
variations in display for different devices and screen sizes.
Web Server are the computers which hosts web sites.
Checksumtechnique used in data transmission to validate data by sending a block of data
calculated from the contents of preceding blocks.
Parity Checktechnique used in data transmission to validate data by sending an additional bit
determined by the contents of the preceding bits to make the total number of 1s odd or even.
Parity Block is an additional byte where the bits are computed from the preceding data bytes. The
bytes are arranged in a grid and each parity byte bit is calculated from the bits in the column
above.
Check digit is a validation technique that involves calculating an additional digit from the ones that
proceed it. Following two Methods are used to calculate check digit
Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) is another method used to check whether data has been
correctly transmitted.
It uses an acknowledgement (a message sent by the receiver indicating that data has been
received correctly) and timeout (this is the time allowed to elapse before an acknowledgement is
received).
If an acknowledgement isn’t sent back to the sender before timeout occurs, then the message is
automatically resent.
With echo check, when data is sent to another device, this data is sent back again to the sender.
The sender compares the two sets of data to check if any errors occurred during the transmission
process.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 40

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


1.2.1 Data Transmission
Data transmission is communicating data among different parts of a computer or among different
computers.
Generally, a network over short distances is called a local area network (LAN) while those over
great distances are wide area networks (WAN). Whether a network is a WAN or a LAN, it allows
the computers to:
● communicate with one another
● share information centrally
● share copies of software
● give access to data and program files to multiple user
In a LAN there is the added benefit of being able to share hardware. For example, the office with 20
computers may only have one or two printers. Also, those printers may be of different types and
used for different tasks.
Types of Communication (on the basis of direction)

Simplex data transmission is sending data in one direction only (i.e. from sender to receiver).
Example: Radio, TV. Data being sent from a computer to a printer, from keyboard to CPU etc.
Half-duplex data transmission is sending data in both directions but only one at a time (i.e. data
can be sent from ‘A’ to ‘B’ or from ‘B’ to ‘A’ along the same line, but not at the same time).
Example: a walkie-talkie, fax machine, reading or burning data on CDs or DVDs, both but not at
the same time.
Full-duplex data transmission is sending data in both directions simultaneously (i.e. data can be
sent from ‘A’ to ‘B’ and from ‘B’ to ‘A’ along the same line, both at the same time).
Example: a phone line, reading and writing data on HDD.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 41

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Methods of communication:
There are two different methods communication on the basis of media

Serial transmission of data

Bit by bit transmission of data using single wire is known as Serial Transmission.
It used for external transmission (between two peripheral devices or devices and CPU).
It is slow but more reliable as well as cost effective as only one wire is needed.
Parallel transmission of data
If the devices are connected by more than one wire, then more bits can be sent simultaneously. A
sensible number of wires would be eight, because then a whole byte can be sent at the same time.
This method of data transfer is called parallel data transmission.
USB (Universal Serial Bus):
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a plug-and-play interface that allows a computer to communicate
with peripheral and other devices.
1. It is a BUS as it has wires to transmit data.
2. It is UNIVERSAL as it connects devices cover a
broad range; anything from keyboards and mice, to music players and flash drives.
3. It is SERIAL as in USB data is transmitted bit by bit. USB has 4 cables of which 2 are used
for power supply (0V and 5V), 1 to send data from PC to peripheral and 1 to receive data
from peripheral.
Error Detection Methods
Following are the methods of error detection during data transmission
Echo Check
The simplest way of checking the transfer of the data is to send the data back again. If the data sent
back are the same as the data sent in the first place then the original data must have reached the
destination unaltered. If not, the data must be sent again. This is known as echoing back. Echoing
back is very effective, but suffers from having to send data twice. The transmission mode needs to
be either duplex or half duplex to allow data transfer in both directions.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 42

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Parity check
A parity check is a single bit which is added to the end of the message, and indicates that the number
of ones in the message is even or odd. If a single error occurs, the receiver could detect it because
parity bits will no longer match.
Checksum
Data are normally sent as blocks of bytes rather than as individual bytes. Whatever the data
represent, they are in binary form and hence could be treated as numbers that can be added
together. Another checking procedure is to add all the bytes that are being sent in the block of data.
Any bits lost at the most-significant end as a carry are ignored, so the answer is an eight-bit number.
This “check byte” or checksum is calculated before the data are sent and then calculated again
when they are received. If there are no errors in the transmission, the two answers match. If,
however, the two bytes are different there must be at least one checksum that has been corrupted
and the whole block of data has to be re-sent.
Sort the steps for Check Sum into order. Write the correct number in the column Step No.

Steps of Check Sum Step No.

The block of data is sent along with check sum.

The check sum is calculated and added to the block of data.

The computer then compares its calculated check sum with the check sum received.

If the two don’t match, then the there is an error in data transmission

The receiving computer calculates check sum.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 43

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (ARQ)
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Automatic_repeat_request
Automatic Repeat reQuest (ARQ), also known as Automatic Repeat Query, is an error-
control method for data transmission that uses acknowledgements (messages sent by the receiver
indicating that it has correctly received a packet) and timeouts (specified periods of time allowed to
elapse before an acknowledgment is to be received) to achieve reliable data transmission over an
unreliable service. If the sender does not receive an acknowledgment before the timeout, it
usually transmits the packet until the sender receives an acknowledgment or exceeds a
predefined number of retransmissions.
Sort the steps for ARQ into order. Write the correct number in the column Step No.

Steps of ARQ Step No.

Sending computer transmits a block of data
After a set period of time, a timeout occurs which triggers the data to be
automatically resent by the sending computer.
The sending computer waits for a period of time to see if receiving computer
acknowledges receipt of the data.
This will continue until the receiving computer acknowledges the data has
been received.
START

SEND DATA

SET Timer RESEND Data

Yes
Ye

Has Timer
timed out?

No
N

Acknowledgement
Received?

Yes
Y

Transmission Successful

STOP

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 44

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Check digit
A check digit is a digit added to a string of numbers for error detection purposes. Normally, the
check digit is computed from the other digits in the string. A check digit helps digital systems detect
changes when data is transferred from transmitter to receiver.
Validation technique that involves calculating an additional digit from the ones that precedes it.
Following two Methods are used to calculate check digit
Modulo-11 Method:

(iv) If Check digit = 10 then it will be represented by X (a representation of 10 in ROMAN )

Modulo-10 Method:
Modulo-10 method is used in check digit calculation in ISBN 13, where the 13th digit of theISBN
code is calculated using the following algorithm.

Steps Example
1. Find sum of digits at odd position

2. Find sum of digits at even position and multiply result by 3

Sum of digits at odd position

9+8+1+7+2+2=29

9 7 8 3 1 2 7 3 2 3 2 0 ?

Sum of digits at even position x 3

3 (7+3+2+3+3+)=54

3. Add both sums 29+54=83

4. Find Mod10 83 MOD 10=3
5. If remainder=0 then
Check digit=0
Else
Check digit=10-Remainder Check digit 10-3=7
ENDIF
Sort the steps for Check Digit into order. Write the correct number in the column Step No.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 45

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Steps of Check Digit Step No.

The human will be asked by computer to re-enter the numerical code

A cashier at point of sale, scans the barcode of the product

The check digit is calculated and added to the barcode, product code at the point of
manufacture.

The computer then compares its calculated check digit with the check digit scanned.

If the two don’t match, then the there is an error in entering or scanning bar code

The computer calculates check digit

Differences and similarities between Checksum and Check Digit

Check Sum Check Digit

This is a verification method This is a validation method

A value is calculated on the block of data A digit is calculated on the item code using
using an algorithm an algorithm at point of manufacturing

appended on the block of data appended on the item code

Receiver recalculates the check sum using At point of sale the check digit is
same algorithm recalculated using same algorithm

If both the checksum are not same, there will If both the check digits are not same three
be an error in data transmission. will be an error in scanning reading item
code.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 46

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
1.2.3 Internet principles of operation

Internet Service Provider (ISP):

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_service_provider
An Internet service provider (ISP) is an organization that provides services for accessing, using,
or participating in the Internet. Internet service providers may be organized in various forms, such
as commercial, community-owned, non-profit, or otherwise privately owned.

Internet services typically provided by ISPs include Internet access, Internet transit, domain
name registration, web hosting, Usenet service etc.

Web browser
https://www.techopedia.com/definition/288/web-browser
A web browser is a software program that allows a user to locate, access, and display web pages.
Browsers translate web pages and websites delivered using Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
into human-readable content.
IP Addressing
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique 32-bit reference number that is allocated to devices on
a computer network that uses the Internet Protocol.
Although IP addresses are stored as 32-bit numbers, for our convenience they are usually displayed
as a series of 4 decimal numbers, each one representing 8 bits of the original binary address.
32-bit binary version: 110010011010000001011011011111111
Decimal version: 201.64.182.255
Some IP addresses are reserved for private network ranges e.g.
10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255
172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 47

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
IPv4
IPv4 is the most widely deployed Internet protocol used to connect devices to the Internet. IPv4
uses a 32-bitaddress scheme allowing for a total of 2^32 addresses (just over 4 billion
addresses).
IPv6
IPv6 addresses are 128-bit IP address for a total of 3.4x10^38 computers.
IPv6 is written in hexadecimal and separated by colons.
An example IPv6 address could be written like this: 3ffe:1900:4545:3:200:f8ff:fe21:67cf
Example Question 2.3:
The table shows four statements about IP addresses.
Tick (‫ )ݱ‬to show which of the statements are true.
Statement True (‫)ݱ‬
The IP address consists of any number of digits separated by single dots (.)
Each number in an IP address can range from 0 to 255
IP addresses are used to ensure that messages and data reach their correct
destinations
Public IP addresses are considered to be more secure than private IP
addresses

Internet Server
Internet server (web server) is a special computer, on which websites are stored. Web Server is
constantly switched on and connected to the Internet so that each Internet user around the world
can access website at all times. This computer is built up with selected high quality components,
which can endure incessant work and high load.
HTTP
Short for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol, the underlying protocol used by the World Wide Web.
HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted, and what actions Web servers and
browsers should take in response to various commands.
Uniform Resource Locator (URL):
URL stands for Uniform Resource Locator. It is the address of a web page. Each page has its own
unique web address (URL).
This is how a computer locates the web page that user is trying to find.
An example of a URL is: http://inqilabpatel.com/computer2210.html.
In this example
a. “http” enables browser to know what protocol is being used to access information in the
domain
b. “ruknuddin.com” is called the domain name.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 48

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
c. "computer2210.html" refers to the specific page.
Domain Name Server (DNS):
Domain Name Servers (DNS) are the Internet's equivalent of a phone book. They maintain a
directory of domain names and translate them to Internet Protocol (IP) addresses.
(i) User types URL of a website in web browser address bar.
(ii) The web browser sends the request of URL to DNS of internet service provider (ISP).
(iii) DNS searches the IP address of the URL.
(iv) URL is translated into machine friendly IP address by DNS.
(v) The translated IP address is sent to browser.
(vi) Browser sends http get command to the server of the IP address where website is
hosted.
(vii) The web server sends HTML data to the client web browser.
(viii) Web page is displayed on client’s browser.

1. User types inqilabpatel.com

2. Browser requests DNS to lookup IP address

DNS Server
3. DNS looks up IP address to browser

User

4. Browser makes HTTP Request to Web Server

5. Web Server HTTP response in the form of html data

Web Server
6. Browser interprets html data and displays web pages

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 49

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Example Question2.5:
A web page offers a link for users to request another web page. The requested web page contains
HTML code.
Put each statement in the correct sequence by writing the numbers 1 to 5 in the right-hand
column.

Statement Sequence No
The requested web page is displayed on the client computer
The user clicks on the hyperlink and the web page is requested from
the web server
The requested web page content is transmitted to the client computer
The client computer processes the html code using the web browser
software
The web server locates the requested web page
WEB DESIGN

A web page is created by writing code in a language called HTML.

HTML stands for Hyper Text Mark-up Language. It was developed especially to create web pages.
You may be looking at a web page right now and thinking "where is this HTML" - I can't see it.
To see the HTML code of most web pages take these steps:
x View the page in a web browser.
x Right click your mouse over the page text and a small menu will appear close to the mouse
(right clicking over a picture gives you a different menu) Click on the "View Source" in the menu
list.
x A page full of words and symbols will appear in a separate window
This is the HTML code that makes up the web page you are viewing.
This is what html looks like.
All the coloured text surrounded by <> are html 'tags'.
Creating pages using a text editor
Advantages Disadvantages
Very flexible as you have complete control of You have to know a lot about HTML
the HTML code code
Low cost - Notepad is free with Windows. And Slow, as all the code has to be written
there are plenty of 'freeware' text editors by hand.
available on the Internet.
Easy to make a mistake.
You have to save the file and look at it
in a web browser to see what it actually
looks like.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 50

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
HTML STRUCTURE is the essential part of the HTML document; it includes the semantics
(meaning) and structural mark-up of the document. It is layout of the website. For example
placement of headings.

HTML PRESENTATION is the style (formatting) of the website i.e. how the page will look. For
example background colour, font size etc. HTML presentation is format of webpage.
Note: Never use design for presentation as it may be consider as layout i.e. structure.
Practice Question) The html has structure and presentation. Tick (㾐) to show which of following
is structure and presentation:
Example Structure Presentation
The colour applied to a text heading on a web page
The font style applied to a paragraph of text on a web page
The placement of a paragraph of text on a web page
The size of an image is set to be displayed at on a page.
The placement of an image next to a paragraph text on a web page
Answer Key:
Example Structure Presentation
The colour applied to a text heading on a web page 㾐
The font style applied to a paragraph of text on a web page 㾐
The placement of a paragraph of text on a web page 㾐
The size of an image is set to be displayed at on a page. 㾐
The placement of an image next to a paragraph text on a web page 㾐

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 51

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
6QRKECN3WGUVKQPUHTQO2CUV2CRGTU
D6XPPHU3
8 Four 7-bit binary values are transmitted from one computer to another. A parity bit is added to
each binary value creating 8-bit binary values. All the binary values are transmitted and received
correctly.
(a) Identify whether each 8-bit binary value has been sent using odd or even parity by writing odd
or even in the type of parity column. [4]
8-bit binary value Type of parity
01100100
10010001
00000011
10110010
(b) An error may not be detected when using a parity check.
Identify why an error may not be detected.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The data is sent using parallel half-duplex data transmission.
(i) Describe how data is sent using parallel half-duplex data transmission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) State two drawbacks of using parallel data transmission.
Drawback 1 .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Drawback 2 .......................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 52

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

E6XPPHU3
7 Jolene uses HTML to create a website. She separates the HTML into structure and presentation.
(a) (i) Give one example of HTML structure.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give two examples of HTML presentation.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Explain why Jolene separates the HTML into structure and presentation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 53

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

F6XPPHU3 6 Four 7-bit binary values are transmitted from one computer to another. A

parity bit is added to each binary value creating 8-bit binary values. All the binary values are
transmitted and received correctly.
(a) Identify whether each 8-bit binary value has been sent using odd or even parity by writing odd
or even in the type of parity column. [4]
8-bit binary value Type of parity
01111100
10010000
10011001
00101001
(b) The 8-bit binary value 10110001 is transmitted and received as 10110010. A parity check does
not identify any errors in the binary value received.
State why the parity check does not identify any errors.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The data is sent using serial duplex data transmission.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 54

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(i) Describe how data is sent using serial duplex data transmission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) State one drawback of using serial data transmission, rather than parallel data transmission.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

3 5WOOGT2
1 (a) State what is meant by the terms:
Parallel data transmission: ..................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
Serial data transmission: ....................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Give one benefit of each type of data transmission.
Parallel data transmission Benefit: ........................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................
Serial data transmission Benefit: ......................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Give one application of each type of data transmission. Each application must be different.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 55

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Parallel data transmission Application: ............................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Serial data transmission Application: ...............................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [2]
2 (a) State what is meant by the term USB.
............................................................................................................................................
……………………………................................................................................................ [1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 56

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(b) Describe two benefits of using USB connections between a computer and a device.
1: ........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
2: .....................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... [2]
ExaminerĜs Comments on Question 2 (a) and (b)
Most candidates gained a mark for their answer to part (a). This was mainly through stating Universal Serial Bus as the full name
for USB. Those candidates that did not provide the name, but instead gave a description also gained a mark. Some candidates in
their description mistook USB as a device rather than a method of connection.
In part (b) candidates mainly gained marks by stating that many computers have the ability to connect using USB as it has become
a universal and industry standard connection. Most candidates referred to the benefits of a USB device rather than the connection
and were unable to gain marks as a result.
4 Choose six correct terms from the following list to complete the spaces in the paragraphs below:
• encryption • file name • firewall • HTML tags/text • IP address
• protocol • proxy server • SSL certificate • web server name
A user enters a URL. The web browser breaks up the URL into three components:
1 ........................................................
2 ........................................................
3 ........................................................
The web server returns the selected web page. The web browser reads
the ............................................................ from the selected page and shows the correctly
formatted page on the user’s screen. A ............................................................ is used between the
user’s computer and the network to examine the data traffic to make sure it meets certain criteria.
To speed up the access to the web pages next time, a ........................................... is used between
the computer and web server; this device uses a cache to store the website home page after it has
been accessed for the first time. [6]

3 5WOOGT2
5 Parity checks are often used to check for errors that may occur during data transmission.
(a) A system uses even parity.
Tick (㾐) to show whether the following three bytes have been transmitted correctly or incorrectly.
Received byte Byte transmitted correctly Byte transmitted incorrectly
11001000
01111100
01101001

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 57

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(b) A parity byte is used to identify which bit has been transmitted incorrectly in a block of data.
The word “F L O W C H A R T” was transmitted using nine bytes of data (one byte per character). A tenth
byte, the parity byte, was also transmitted.
The following block of data shows all ten bytes received after transmission. The system uses even parity
and column 1 is the parity bit.

(i) One of the bits has been transmitted incorrectly.

Write the byte number and column number of this bit:
Byte number .............................................Column number ......................................................[2]
(ii) Explain how you arrived at your answer for part (b)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Give the denary (base 10) value of the byte: 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A parity check may not identify that a bit has been transmitted incorrectly.
Describe one situation in which this could occur.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
3 9KPVGT2
6 (a) Explain what is meant by HTML.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. .........................................................................................................
....................... [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 58

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(b) HTML uses both structure and presentation.
Describe what is meant by the two terms.
Signal sent to a processor which may cause a break in execution
Browser of the current routine, according to priorities

HTML Company that provides individual’s access to the Internet and

other services such as webhosting and emails
Internet service Software application used to locate, retrieve and display content
provider on the World Wide Web e.g. web pages, videos and other files

Interrupt
Hardware identification number that uniquely identifies each
device on a network; it is manufactured into every network card
IP address and cannot be altered

Authoring language used to create documents on the World

MAC address Wide Web; uses tags and attributes

Location of a given computer/device on a network; can be a

static or dynamic value
Structure: ...........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................
Presentation: .....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................ [2]

(c) Explain the function of a web browser.

............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
........................[3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 59

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 9KPVGT2
4 Six computer terms and six descriptions are shown below.
Draw a line to link each term to its appropriate description.[5]

12 Parity checks are used to check for errors during data transmission. A system uses odd parity.
(a) Complete the following two bytes of data so that they both have odd parity:
1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 1 1
(b) Name and describe another method which can be used to check whether data has been
correctly transmitted.
Name of method: .................................................................................................................
Description: ........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

3 5WOOGT22
4 (a) Nikita wishes to print out some documents and connects her printer to the computer using one of the
USB ports.
(i) Identify what type of data transmission is being used.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Give three reasons for using a USB port.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
3 ....................................................................................................................................... [3]
9 Check digits are used to ensure the accuracy of entered data.
A 7-digit number has an extra digit on the right, called the check digit.

The check digit is calculated as follows:

͌ each digit in the number is multiplied by its digit position
͌ the seven results are then added together
͌ this total is divided by 11
͌ the remainder gives the check digit (if the remainder = 10, the check digit is X)
(a) Calculate the check digit for the following number. Show all your working.
4241508…
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
Check digit ................................................................................................................... [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 60

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

(b) An operator has just keyed in the following number:

3240045X
Circle below correct if the check digit is correct OR incorrect if the check digit is incorrect.
Correct incorrect
Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............. [3]
Q 7) Summer 2016 P12
6 (a) Three descriptions of data transmission are given below. [6]
Tick (㾐) the appropriate box in each table to show the:
• type of transmission
• method of transmission
Description 1:
Data is transmitted several bits at a time down several wires in both directions simultaneously.
Type Tick (㾐) Method Tick (㾐)
simplex serial
half-duplex parallel
full-duplex
Description 2:
Data is transmitted in one direction only, one bit at a time, down a single wire.
Type Tick (㾐) Method Tick (㾐)
simplex serial
half-duplex parallel
full-duplex
Description 3:
Data is transmitted one bit at a time down a single wire; the data is transmitted in both directions
but not at the same time.
Type Tick (㾐) Method Tick (㾐)
simplex serial
half-duplex parallel
full-duplex

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 61

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(b) Give two reasons why serial transmission, rather than parallel transmission, is used to connect
devices to a computer.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................[2]
11 Describe the use of structure and presentation in a HTML document.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................[4]

3 9KPVGT2
3 (b) A computer in a factory is connected to a printer. The printer is located in an office 1km away
from the factory.
Identify which data transmission method would be most suitable for this connection.
...................................................................................................................................................
Give two reasons for your choice.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 62

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 9KPVGT2
3 Five computer terms and seven descriptions are shown below.

Draw a line to connect each computer term to its correct description. [5]
Computer term Description
Serial, simplex data Several bits of data sent down several
transmission wires, in both directions, but not at the
same time

Several bits of data sent down several

wires, in both directions, at the same
time
Parallel, half-duplex
data transmission
An even or odd number of bits set to 1
in a byte, used to check if the byte has
been transmitted correctly

One bit sent at a time, over a single

wire in one direction only
Parity check
An additional digit placed at the end of
a number to check if the number has
been entered correctly
Automatic repeat
request (ARQ)
A value transmitted at the end of a
block of data; it is calculated using the
other elements in the data stream and
is used to check for transmission errors

Checksum An error detection method that uses

response and time out when
transmitting data; if a response is not
sent back to the sender in an agreed
amount of time, then the data is re-sent

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 63

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
5 (c) A microprocessor regularly samples the output, X. Each sample value is stored in an 8-bit
register as shown below. One bit of this register is reserved as a parity bit.
Five consecutive output values of 1 indicate a fault condition.
Identify which of the following registers shows a fault condition.

Parity bit

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Register Y

0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 Register Z

Register ............................................. [1]

(d) When eight bytes of data have been collected, they are transmitted to a computer 100km
away. Parity checks are carried out to identify if the data has been transmitted correctly. The
system uses even parity and column 1 is the parity bit.
The eight bytes of data are sent together with a ninth parity byte:
parity column column column column column column column
bit 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
byte 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
byte 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
byte 3 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
byte 4 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
byte 5 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
byte 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
byte 7 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
byte 8 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
Parity byte 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

(i) Identify which of the eight bytes contains an error.

byte ...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Identify which column contains an error.
column ...........................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The incorrect bit is indicated where the byte number and column cross.
Give the corrected byte. [1]

(iv) Calculate the denary value of the corrected byte.

...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(v) Considering the fault condition given in part (c), explain why it is very important that the
incorrect bit is located and corrected.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 64

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 /CTEJ+PFKC

5 Give the meaning of the following terms.

HTML ..................................................................................................................................................
http .....................................................................................................................................................
https ...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. [3]
3 5WOOGT2
4 Five statements about serial half-duplex data transmission are shown in the table below. Tick (
3) to show whether each statement is true or false. [5]
Statement true false
Data is transmitted in one direction only, one bit at a time.
Data is transmitted in both directions, multiple bits at a time.
Data is transmitted in one direction only, multiple bits at a time.
Data is transmitted in both directions, but only one direction at a
time. Data is transmitted one bit at a time.
Data is transmitted in both directions, but only one direction at a
time. Data is transmitted multiple bits at a time.

3 5WOOGT2
4There are various methods used to detect errors that can occur during data transmission and
storage.
Describe each of the following error detection methods.
Parity check .......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................
Check digit ......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
Checksum .....................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................
Automatic Repeat request (ARQ) ................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... [8]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 65

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 9KPVGT2
4 A file server is used as a central data store for a network of computers.
Rory sends data from his computer to a file server that is approximately 100 metres away. It is
important that the data is transmitted accurately. Rory needs to be able to read data from and
write data to the file server at the same time.
(a) (i) Use ticks to identify the most suitable data transmission methods for this application.[2]

Method 1 Method 2Tick Tick

Serial Simplex
Parallel Half-duplex
Duplex
(ii) Explain why your answer to part (a)(i) is the most suitable data transmission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]

3 /CTEJ2 +PFKC 

3 Parity checks can be used to check for errors during data transmission.
One of the bytes has been transmitted incorrectly.
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
10110011 10101000 10110100 10110101
(a) State which byte was incorrectly transmitted.
............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain how you identified the incorrectly transmitted byte.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................[3]

8(a) Three descriptions and two methods of data transmission are given.
Tick (½) the correct box to show the Method of data transmission for each description. [3]

Description Method

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 66

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Serial Parallel
Multiple bits are sent and received at the same time.
Bits are sent one at a time in a single direction.
Bits are sent using a single wire. Data can be sent or
received, but not at the same time.
(b) Three descriptions and three types of data transmission are given.
Tick (½) the correct box to show the Type of data transmission for each description. [3]
Type
Description
Simplex Half-duplex Duplex
Multiple bits are sent and received at the same time.
Bits are sent one at a time in a single direction.
Bits are sent using a single wire. Data can be sent or
received, but not at the same time.
3 9KPVGT27 Six internet terms and six definitions are listed. Draw a line to connect
each term to a correct definition.
[5]
Internet term Definition
A program that allows a user to view web
Browser
pages

Internet Service Provider The main protocol that governs the

(ISP) transmission of data using the Internet

Hyper Text Transfer Protocol The website address that is typed into the
(HTTP) address bar

Uniform Resource Locator An address given to each device on a

(URL) network. It is provided by the network

A unique address given to a device on a

MAC address
network. It is provided by the manufacturer

A company that provides a connection to

IP address
access the Internet

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 67

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 /CTEJ2

4 Darius is writing a computer program that allows binary values to be calculated.

Darius is sending several programs that he has created to his friend Selma.
(d) Errors can occur when data is transmitted, stored or entered into a system.
Darius could use an error detection method to find whether errors have occurred.
One error detection method he could use is a checksum.
(i) Describe how a checksum detects errors.
.................................................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) State three other error detection methods that Darius could use.
Method 1 .........................................................................................................................................
Method 2 ........................................................................................................................................
Method 3 ................................................................................................................................... [3]
6 Nadia purchases a printer to print out her homework.
She connects the printer to her computer using USB.
(a) Explain what is meant by USB. [3]

3 5WOOGT2
1 (b) Explain what is meant by a MAC address. [4]

3 5WOOGT2
6 Priya creates a website to sell her old comic books and superhero figures.
(a) She uses HTML to create her website. The HTML she produces has both structure and
presentation.
Explain what is meant by HTML structure and presentation. Include an example of each. [4]
(c) Priya stores her website on a web server.
To transmit the website data to the web server she uses parallel duplex data transmission.
Describe how data is transmitted using parallel duplex data transmission.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................. [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 68

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(d) Priya has a URL for her website. State what is meant by a URL.
............................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [1]
3 Blair writes a paragraph about data transmission in her Computer Science examination.
Use the list given to complete Blair’s paragraph by inserting the correct five missing terms. Not all
terms will be used. Terms can be used more than once.
• duplex • half-duplex • parallel • serial • simplex
....................................................................... data transmission is when data is transmitted a
single bit at a time. ....................................................................... data transmission is when
multiple bits of data are sent all at once. If a user wants to transmit data over a long distance, with
the highest chance of accuracy, .......................................................................data transmission
should be used. If data needs to be transmitted in one direction only, for example from a computer
to a printer, ................................................... data transmission should be used. If a user has a
large amount of data to transmit and this needs to be done as quickly as
possible.............................................. data transmission should be used. [5]

3 9KPVGT2
7 (b) State three functions of a browser.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The website Gerald visits uses https. Explain what is meant by https.
...................................................................................................................................................... [3]
Q 26) Summer 20 P12
5 Meena uses a browser to research information for her business.
(a) Give three functions of a browser.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................ [3]

Q 28) Winter 20 P12

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 69

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
1 Tina is creating a website for charity events. She uses HTML to create the website.
(a) State what is meant by HTML.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) She uses the hexadecimal colour code #43B7F0 as the background colour for her website.
(i) State whether background colour is an example of structure or presentation, in the website.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
5 Arjun uses a scanner to create digital versions of some printed documents.
The scanner is attached to his computer using a USB connection.
(a) Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if the USB connection uses Parallel or Serial data transmission.
Describe your chosen method of data transmission.
Parallel
Serial
Description
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]

2 Gurdeep sets up a web server to host her website. She reads about an Internet Protocol (IP)
address, a Media Access Control (MAC) address and a Uniform Resource Locator (URL).
Draw a line to connect each term to the correct example. [2]

Term Example
IP address 192.168.0.255

MAC address https://www.cambridgeinternational.org

URL 00:15:E9:2B:99:3C

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 70

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Chapter 3

1.3.1 Binary Logic

Have Read
To Revise

Prepared
To Read
S No Learning Outcome

1.3.1: Logic gates Have

22 use logic gates to create electronic circuits
Understand and define the functions of NOT, AND, OR, NAND, NOR and
XOR (EOR) gates, including the binary output produced from all the
23
possible binary inputs (all gates, except the NOT gate, will have 2
inputs only)
24 Draw truth tables and recognise a logic gate from its truth table
25 Produce truth tables for given logic circuits,
Produce a logic circuit to solve a given problem or to implement a
26
given written logic statement
27 Write down logic statement of given logic circuit
28 Simplify the logic circuit
29 Boolean algebra
30 Solving past paper questions

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 71

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
1.3.1 Logic Gates
Many electronic circuits have to make decisions. They look at two or more inputs and
use these to determine the outputs from the circuit. The process of doing this uses electronic logic,
which is based on digital switches called Logical Gates.
Logic gates are devices that can combine multiple inputs at independent logic levels and come up
with an output accordingly. They are used by implementing Boolean algebra. Logic gates have two
or more input and one output except NOT Gate which has one input and one output.
The most common Logical Gates are given below:

For example, The most obvious use is for simple control. Imagine designing a washing machine so
that the water only turns on when the washing is loaded (logic-1), the door is closed (logic-1) but the
clothes are not yet wet (logic-0). This can be done by ANDing the first two conditions, and inverting
the third. Now, AND these together, and you get a high only when all three conditions are satisfied.
Two or more logic gates can be connected to produce a logic circuit with one or more outputs from
two or more inputs.
Truth Tables:
“A truth table is used to show the output of a logic gate or circuit
for all possible combinations of input values.”
Usually the binary values are used, 1 and 0, as shorthand for
True and False.
The truth table for a two-input gate needs four rows (22=4) while
for 3-input gate needs eight rows (23=16).

(i) NOT Gate (Inverter):

A NOT gate or an inverter is the simplest kind of logic gate. Its
function is to give the opposite output to its input - if it gets a
high (1), it gives a low (0), and vice versa.
This is equivalent to saying that the output is not the input.
NOT Gate
The output X) =1 if Input A Output X
INPUT A is NOT 1(i.e. 0 or OFF). 0 1
X = NOT A 1 0
ഥ
X= ࡭

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 72

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(ii) AND Gate
An AND gate gives an output 1 only when both inputs are 1.
If one or more inputs are 0, then the output is also 0.
Input A Input B Output x
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

The output (called X) is true (i.e. 1 or ON) only if the (INPUT A AND INPUT B) are both true (i.e. 1
or ON).
The x=1 if
INPUT A is 1 AND INPUT B is 1
Or X =A AND B
Or X = A . B (read as X equals to A AND B)

(iii) OR Gate
An OR gate gives an output 1 when EITHER input is 1.
If any input is 1 output will be 1.
Input A Input B Output x
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

The output (called X) is true (i.e. 1 or ON) if the (INPUT A OR INPUT B) are true (i.e. 1 or ON).
The OUTPUT X=1 IF
Either INPUT A is 1 OR INPUT B is 1
Or X= A OR B
Or X = A + B (read as X equals to A OR B)

(iv) NAND Gate

This NOT AND combination is shortened to just NAND.
A NAND gate gives a 1 only when BOTH INPUT ARE NOT 1.
A NAND gate gives 0 output only when both inputs are 1. If one or more inputs are 0, then the output
is 1.
Input A Input B A AND B OUTPUT X
0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1
1 1 1 0
The output (called X) is False (i.e. 0 or OFF) if
(INPUT A = 1 AND INPUT B = 1) are NOT both true (i.e. 1 or ON). Is 1
Or X = A NAND B
Or X = തതതതതത
࡭Ǥ ࡮

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 73

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(v) NOR Gate
This NOT OR combination is shortened to just NOR.
A NOR gate gives a 1 only when NEITHER INPUT IS 1.
A NOR Gate gives 1 as output only if no inputs are 1. If an input is 1, then the output is 0.

Input A Input B A OR B OUTPUT X

0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0
The OUTPUT x=0 IF
Either INPUT A is 1 OR INPUT B is 1
Or X = A NOR B
Or X = തതതതതതതതത
࡭ ൅ ࡮

(vi) XOR Gate

The 'Exclusive-OR' gate is a circuit which will give a 1 output if either, but not both, of its two
inputs are 1. If both inputs are same then output will be 0 else output will be 1

Input A Input B Output x

0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
The OUTPUT X=1 IF 1 1 0
Either A is 1 AND B is NOT 1
Or A is NOT 1 AND B is 1
Or X = A ْ
Truth tables
A truth table is used to show the output of a logic gate or circuit for all possible combinations of input
values; we usually use the binary values, 1 and 0, as shorthand for True and False.

The truth table for a two-input gate needs four rows.

INPUT OR AND NAND NOR XOR
A B
X=A + B X=A . B X = തതതതതത
࡭Ǥ ࡮ X = തതതതതതതതത
࡭ ൅ ࡮ A ْ
0 0 0 0 1 1 0
0 1 1 0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 0 0 0

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 74

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Logic circuits
Two or more logic gates can be connected to produce a logic circuit with one or more outputs from
two or more inputs. A logic circuit can process logical expressions and binary numbers.
When producing a truth table for a logic circuit:
• it is helpful to add a column for each intermediate output as well as for the final output
• as for a single logic gate with two inputs, a logic circuit with two inputs needs four rows.
Combinational logic circuits with three inputs
We only need to be able to produce a truth table for a logic circuit with a maximum of three inputs
and six gates.
The truth table for a three-input logic circuit needs eight rows.

Designing simple logic circuits

Sometimes, it is cheaper to design and hard-wire a logic circuit for a simple automated system that
only requires a fixed pattern of output depending on the current values of the inputs, than to program
a microcontroller or computer.
We can use the words AND, OR, NOT, NAND and NAND as operators in a logical equation, such
as L = (A AND B) OR NOT B. We use brackets to indicate that the logical operation within the
brackets takes priority.
We can design a logic circuit to solve a written statement of a logical problem. First, we rewrite the
statement using brackets to clarify the binary value of each variable and the priority of the logical
operations. Then we can write the logical equation. From the logical equation, if not an earlier stage
in the rewriting process, it should be possible to draw the required logic circuit and a truth table to
confirm that it has the required behaviour.

Testing logic circuits

We have seen how to use a truth table to check whether a logic circuit has solved a given problem,
rather as we use a trace table for dry running a flowchart or pseudo code algorithm. We can also
check that a logic circuit solves the problem by building the circuit using logic simulation software or
electronic circuitry, with appropriate attention to safety.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 75

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Logic Building Block
It is possible to build up any logic gate, using NAND or NOR gates only.
NAND and NOR Gates can be used to build any other gates, and called ‘logic building block’. It is
cost effective for manufacturer to use a single gate to build any logic circuit.
For example, the AND, OR and NOT gates can be built from these gates as shown below:
NAND as NOT:
If single input is given to NAND or NOT gate output will inverted

NAND as AND:
NAND on NAND will become AND

NAND as OR:

NAND as NOR

NAND as XOR

For example

Re-draw the logic circuit shown opposite, using

NAND and NOR gates only.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 76

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
18c Summer 21 P13
8 Consider the following logic circuit:

(a) Two NOT gates are used in the given logic circuit.
Identify three other logic gates that are used in the given logic circuit.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) Consider the completed truth table for the given logic circuit.
Row No A B C Working space X
1 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 1 1
3 0 1 0 0
4 0 1 1 0
5 1 0 0 1
6 1 0 1 1
7 1 1 0 0
8 1 1 1 1
There are four errors in the truth table in the output (X) column.
Identify the four incorrect outputs. Write the row number to identify each incorrect output.
Row .......................
Row .......................
Row .......................
Row ....................... [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 77

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

18b Summer 21 P12 ) 3 Consider the logic statement:

X = ((((NOT A AND B) OR C) AND B) NOR (B OR C))
(a) Draw a logic circuit to represent the given logic statement.
Do not attempt to simplify the statement. All logic gates must have a maximum of two inputs. [6]

(b) Consider the completed truth table for the given logic statement.
Row No A B C Working space X
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 1
3 0 1 0 1
4 0 1 1 0
5 1 0 0 1
6 1 0 1 0
7 1 1 0 1
8 1 1 1 1
There are four errors in the truth table in the output (X) column. Identify the four incorrect outputs.
Row .......................
Row .......................
Row .......................
Row ....................... [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 78

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

D6XPPHU3
6 Consider the logic statement:
X = (((A AND B) OR (C AND NOT B)) XOR NOT C)
(a) Draw a logic circuit to represent the given logic statement.
Do not attempt to simplify the statement. All logic gates must have a maximum of two inputs. [6]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 79

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(b) Consider the completed truth table for the given logic statement.
Row Working space
A B C X
number
1 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 1 1
3 0 1 0 0
4 0 1 1 1
5 1 0 0 0
6 1 0 1 1
7 1 1 0 0
8 1 1 1 1
There are four errors in the truth table in the output (X) column.
Identify the four incorrect outputs.
Write the row number to identify each incorrect output.
Row ........................
Row ........................
Row ........................
Row ........................ [4]

Q 3.1) Identify each of the following gates from truth table:

INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUTPUT INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUTPUT

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 80

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 0

……………………………. ………………………………….
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUTPUT INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUTPUT
0 0 0 0 0 o
0 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 0

……………………………………. ……………………………………
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUTPUT INPUT 2 OUTPUT
0 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0

……………………………………. ……………………………………

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 81

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Q 3.7a) A greenhouse control system has four input parameters (H, D, T, W) and two outputs (X, Y
).
Description of
Parameter Binary value Condition
parameter
0 Too low
H Humidity
1 Acceptable
0 Night
D Day
1 Day
0 Too high
T Temperature
1 Acceptable
0 Closed
W Windows
1 Open

The watering system turns on (X = 1) if:

either it is daytime and the temperature is too high
or the humidity is too low.
The fan turns on (Y = 1) if the temperature is too high and the windows are closed.
Draw a logic circuit to represent the greenhouse control system. [6]

(b) Complete the truth table for the logic expression: X = NOT A AND (B NAND C) [4]

A B C Working space X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 82

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Q 3.9a) A student needs to design a logic circuit to model the requirements for membership of a sn
ooker club. Membership (X) depends on four criteria, as shown in the table:
Description of Binary
Parameter Condition
parameter value
1 True
A Over 18
0 False
1 True
B Recommended
0 False
1 True
C Full-time
0 False
1 True
D Retired
0 False

Membership is approved (X = 1) if the person:

• is over the age of 18 and has been recommended by a pre-existing member
and
• either is working full-time or is retired, but not both.
Draw a logic circuit to represent the membership requirements.

(b) Complete the truth table for the logic expression: X = (A XOR B) AND NOT C [4]

A B C Working space X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 83

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

From 2020, logic statements in the Paper 1 examination might not include the output andinput
values, such as 1 and 0. Therefore candidates must know how to interpret logic statements both
with and without input and output values being written in the logic statement.
For example, the logic statement:
X = 1 if ((A is 1 OR B is 1) AND (A is 1 AND B is 1)) OR (C is NOT 1)
Can also be written as:
X = ((A OR B) AND (A AND B)) OR (NOT C)

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 84

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Logic Building Block

It is possible to build up any logic gate, using NAND or NOR gates only.
NAND and NOR Gates can be used to build any other gates, and called ‘logic building block’. It is
cost effective for manufacturer to use a single gate to build any logic circuit.
For example, the AND, OR and NOT gates can be built from these gates as shown below:
NAND as NOT:
If single input is given to NAND or NOT gate output will inverted

NAND as AND:
NAND on NAND will become AND

NAND as OR:

NAND as NOR

NAND as XOR

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 85

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
For example

Re-draw the logic circuit shown opposite, using

NAND and NOR gates only.

Complete the truth table for following circuits:

A B Working X
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

Which single gate performs the same function? ………………………….

A B Working X
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

Which single gate performs the same function? ………………………….

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 86

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Simplification Logic Circuit:
Simplification means reducing the number of components in a logic circuit. As a result of
simplification the cost of production can be less. This can also improve reliability and make it
easier to trace faults if they occur.
The following logic circuit can be simplified to use only one gate.

Give the name of this single gate.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

Q 3.3)Show by drawing a truth table which single logic gate or what else has the same function as
the logic circuit drawn in
a)
INPUT Workspace OUTPUT
A B X
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

b)

INPUT Workspace OUTPUT

A B C
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 87

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
c)
INPUT Workspace OUTPUT
A B X
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

d)
INPUT Workspace OUTPUT
A B C
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
e) Explain why a single logic gate is often replaced by a logic circuit such as shown in part a, b, c
and d.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................[1]

Q 3.4)What could replace the whole logic circuit?

INPUT Workspace
P Q R X
1 1 1
1 1 0
1 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 1
0 1 0
0 0 1
0 0 0

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 88

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Multiple output:
Q 3.5) Multiple outputs can be obtained from a logic circuit. For example in the given logic circuit 2 outputs ‘S’
and ‘C’ are generated.
INPUT OUTPUT
A B S C
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

Q 6)The following three logic statements define the light sequence:

• R = 1 IF (A is NOT 1)
• G = 1 IF (B is 1 AND C is 1)
• Y = 1 IF (A is 1 AND NOT (B is 1 AND C is 1))
Draw the logic circuit that directly combines ALL three of these logic statements and
produces three outputs R, G and Y. [5]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 89

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(b) (i) Complete the truth table for the logic circuit. [2]

A B Working space X Y
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

3 5WOOGT2
3 (a) Complete the truth table for the following logic circuit:

A B C Workspace X
1 1 1
1 1 0
1 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 1
0 1 0
0 0 1
0 0 0

(b) Draw a logic circuit which corresponds to the following logic statement:
X = 1 if ((A is NOT 1 OR B is 1) AND C is 1) OR (B is NOT 1 AND C is 1)

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 90

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(c) Write a logic statement which corresponds to the following logic circuit:

.........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................[3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 91

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT2
6 A gas fire has a safety circuit made up of logic gates. It generates an alarm (X = 1) in response to certain
conditions.
Input Description Binary Conditions
value
1 gas pressure is correct
G gas pressure
0 gas pressure is too high
1 carbon monoxide level is correct
C carbon monoxide level
0 carbon monoxide level is too high
1 no gas leak is detected
L gas leak detection
0 gas leak is detected
The output X = 1 is generated under the following conditions:
gas pressure is correct AND carbon monoxide level is too high
OR
carbon monoxide level is correct AND gas leak is detected
(a) Draw a logic circuit for this safety system. [5]

(b) Complete the truth table for the safety system. [4]

G C L Workspace X
1 1 1
1 1 0
1 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 1
0 1 0
0 0 1
0 0 0

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 92

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT22
5 A computer-controlled machine produces plastic sheets. The thickness of each sheet must be
within a certain tolerance. The sheets are kept below 50 °C as they move over rollers at 10 metres
per second.
Three parameters need to be monitored all the time.
Binary
Parameter Description Conditions
value
1 thickness of sheet in tolerance
D sheet thickness
0 thickness of sheet out of tolerance
1 roller speed = 10 metres/second
S roller speed
0 roller speed <> 10 metres/second
1 temperature < 50 °C
T Temperature
0 temperature >= 50 °C
An alarm, X, will sound if:
thickness is in tolerance AND (roller speed <> 10 metres/second OR temperature >= 50 °C)
OR
roller speed = 10 metres/second AND temperature >= 50 °C
(a) Draw a logic circuit to represent the above monitoring system. [6]

(b) Complete the truth table for the monitoring system. [4]
D S T Working Space X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 93

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT2
7 (b) Draw a logic circuit corresponding to the following logic statement:
X = 1 if ( ( A is 1 OR B is 1 ) AND ( A is 1 AND B is 1 ) ) OR ( C is NOT 1 )

(c) Re-draw the following logic circuit using NAND gates only.

Logic circuit re-drawn:

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 94

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 9KPVGT2
7 (a) Complete the truth tables and name the single logic gate that could replace each logic circuit:

(i) A B Working space X

0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

Single logic gate ............................................................................................................[3]

(ii) A B Working space X

0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1

Single logic gate ............................................................................................................[3]

14 A system controls the flow of vehicles through a barrier based on three lights, A, B and C.
When a light is red, the signal is zero. When a light is green, the signal is one.
The barrier will open when the output X is one.
The barrier opens if either:
• light A is red and lights B and C are both green
or
• light A is green and lights B and C are both red
(a) Design a logic circuit for the system
.
(b) Complete the truth table for the system given at the start of Question 14. [4]
A B C Working space X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 95

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT2
10 (b) Write a logic statement that corresponds with the following logic circuit.

X = ............................................................................................................................. [3]
3 9KPVGT2

7 Draw a logic circuit to represent the logic statement: [7]

X = 1 if (A is NOT 1 AND B is 1) AND (A is NOT 1 AND C is NOT 1) OR (B is 1 AND C is 1)

3 9KPVGT2
5 (a) Draw a logic circuit for the logic statement:
X = 1 if ((A is 1 AND B is 1) OR (A is NOT 1 AND C is 1)) [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 96

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(b) Draw the symbol for an XOR gate and explain the function of this logic gate.

Explanation ........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]

3 9KPVGT2
3 A greenhouse uses a system to monitor the conditions that plants need to grow.
The inputs to the system are:
Input Binary value Condition
1 Window is open
W
0 Window is closed
1 Temperature >=26°C
T
0 Temperature <26°C
1 Humidity >=50%
H
0 Humidity <50%
The system will sound an alarm when certain conditions are detected.
Alarm (X) will sound (=1) when:
window is closed and temperature >=26°C
or
temperature <26°C and humidity >=50%
Draw a logic circuit to represent the system. [5]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 97

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 /CTEJ2
5 Consider the following logic statement:
X = 1 if ((A is 1 NAND C is 1) NOR A is NOT 1) OR (B is 1 AND C is NOT 1)
(a) Draw a logic circuit that represents the given logic statement. Your logic gates must have a
maximum of two inputs. Do not simplify the logic statement. [6]

(b) Complete the truth table for the given logic statement. [4]
Working space
A B C X
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
3 5WOOGT2
2 Rajesh creates a logic circuit.
He uses three different logic gates in his circuit. Each logic gate has a maximum of two inputs.
He describes the logic of each gate.
(a) “The only time the output will be 1 is when both inputs are 1.”
State the single logic gate ...................................................
Draw the single logic gate: [2]
(b) “The only time the output will be 1 is when both inputs are 0.”
State the single logic gate ...................................................
Draw the single logic gate: [2]
(c) “The only time the output will be 0 is when both inputs are 1.”
State the single logic gate ...................................................
Draw the single logic gate: [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 98

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 (b) A water control system uses a switch and two pressure sensors.
The outputs of the switch and sensors are shown in the table.
Sensor or Switch Output of 1 Output of 0
Switch (S1) On Off
Pressure Sensor (P1) >= 3 <3
Pressure Sensor (P2) >= 3 <3
Create a logic circuit that will produce an output (X) of 1 when:
The switch S1 is on
and
either P1 is less than 3 or P2 is less than 3, but not both.
All logic gates used must have a maximum of two inputs. [4]

3 5WOOGT2
(b) Complete the truth table for the given logic statement: [4]
X = (((A OR C) AND (NOT A AND NOT C)) XOR B)

A B C Working space X

0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 99

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Chapter 4

1.3.2 Computer Architecture

Have Revised
Have Read
To Revise

Learning Outcome
Prepared
To Read

1.3.2: Computer architecture and the fetch-execute cycle

Show understanding of the basic Von Neumann model for a computer
system and the stored program concept (program instructions and
data are stored in main memory and instructions are fetched and
executed one after another)
Describe the stages of the fetch-execute cycle

Von Neumann Architecture

The idea about how computers should be built was proposed by John von Neumann in 1945.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 100

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Von Neumann gave an idea how to build computer. This idea is also called the von Neumann
Architecture or Model.
A computer should have input/output devices, Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU),
Control Unit (CU) and computer memory (storage device).
Firstly programs should be stored in computer’s memory (storage devices).
From storage devices programs should be loaded into CPU (ALU & CU) for
execution.
This is still the basis for computers today.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 101

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Stored Program Concept:
The idea given by von Neumann, according to this concept computer should have storage device
to store data and instruction to be processed. Data and instructions are first stored in secondary
storage (HDD or SSD). Then they are loaded in main memory (RAM. Form main memory data and
instructions are fetched in registers inside CPU. Decoder of CU decodes the instruction and ALU
executes the instructions and results are stored firstly in main memory and then in secondary
storage.
Examiner Comments on Question to explain Stored Program Concept
This question appeared to be very challenging for candidates. Many candidates described the
fetch execute cycle. It would be helpful if candidates understood that the stored program concept
is a specific infrastructure for the central processing unit and not the fetch execute cycle. It would
be encouraging to see candidates demonstrate a more confident level of knowledge of the stored
program concept.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 102

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Components of von Neumann Model
Von Neumann Model has following four components:
1. Input/Output Devices
2. Memory Unit
3. Control Unit
4. Arithmetic Logic Unit
Input/output (I/O) Devices
The Input/output (I/O) components of a computer are hardware devices that are responsible for
getting data from the computer to the user or from the user to the computer.
Data going from the user to the computer is called "input." The two main input devices are the
mouse and the keyboard.
Output devices are used to transmit data from the computer's memory to the user. The two output
devices almost every computer system has are the monitor and the printer.
Memory Unit
Computer has several types of memory. Memory unit in the Von Neumann model is the main
memory, also called RAM or Random Access Memory. It also refers as Immediate Access Store
(IAS).
Immediate Access Store (i.e. main memory) holds data and
instructions when they are waiting to be processed.
What distinguishes a computer from a calculator is the ability
to run a stored program; main memory allows the computer
to do that.
RAM can be thought of as a sequence of boxes, called
cells, each of which can hold a certain amount of data.
The remaining three components of the von Neumann
model of a computer are found inside the Processor.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 103

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Control Unit
The control unit controls the sequencing and timing of all operations. It contains a "clock," that is
actually a quartz crystal that vibrates million times per second. The clock emits an electronic signal
for each vibration. Each separate operation is synchronized to the clock signal. For example 1 st pc
operates at 4.7 MHz means 4.7 million instructions per second.
The functions of CU are given below:
x It controls and monitors all activities of computer
x It controls speed of processing using system clock
x It fetches instructions from memory into CPU
x It decodes the instructions.
Arithmetic & Logic Unit (ALU)
Arithmetic unit perform arithmetical operations like +, -, *, and / while logical unit are to compare
two quantities. Logical operations are important in computer programming.
ALU can be thought of as being similar to a calculator, except that, in addition to normal math, it
can also do logical (true/false) operations.
The functions of ALU are given below:
x The arithmetic unit carries out arithmetic like addition, division.
x The logic unit enables the processor to make comparison like =, <, > and logical decisions like
AND, OR, NOT.
x The arithmetic logic unit carries out communication with peripheral devices.
x It also carries out bit shifting operation.
Register:
Registers are located on the CPU, and used temporarily for storing data. Because the registers
are close to the ALU, they are made out of fast memory, efficiently speeding up calculations.
Registers store data fetched from Immediate Access Store i.e. main memory.
Immediate Access Store (i.e. main memory) holds data and instructions when they are waiting to
be processed.
Register Holds data or instructions temporarily when they are being processed.
There are 16 registers. Some examples are
a) Program Counter (PC) - an incrementing counter that keeps track of the next memory
address of the instruction that is to be executed once the execution of the current instruction is
completed.
b) Memory Address Register (MAR) - the address in main memory that is currently being read
or written

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 104

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
c) Memory Buffer/Data Register (MBR/MBR) - a two-way register that holds data fetched from
memory (and ready for the CPU to process) or data waiting to be stored in memory
d) Current Instruction register (CIR) - a temporary holding ground for the instruction that has
just been fetched from memory
e) Accumulator Register (ACC)is used for storing data for ALU to process and the results those
are produced by the ALU.
Buses: ''The set of wires used to travel signals to and from CPU and different components of
computer is called Bus.''
Bus is a group of parallel wires that is
used as a communication path. As a wire
transmits a single bit so 8-bits bus can transfer
8 bits (1 byte) at a time and 16-bits bus can
transfer 16 bits (2 bytes) and so on. There are
three types of buses according to three types
of signals, these are:
a) Data Bus: ''The buses which are used to
transmit data between CPU, memory and
peripherals are called Data Bus.''
b) Address Bus: ''The buses which are
connecting the CPU with main memory and used to identify particular locations (address) in main
memory where data is stored are called Address Buses.''
c) Control Bus: The wires which are used to transmit the control signals (instructions) generated
by Control Unit to the relevant component of the computer.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 105

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Example Question
Q 1 (a) One of the key features of von Neumann computer architecture is the use of buses.
Three buses and three descriptions are shown below. Draw a line to connect each bus to its
correct description.

This bus carries signals used to

Address bus coordinate the computer’s activities

Control bus This bi-directional bus is used to

exchange data between processor,
memory and input/ output devices
Data bus
This uni-directional bus carries signals
relating to memory addresses between
processor and memory
Q 2)

The diagram above shows a simplified form of processor architecture.

Name the three buses labelled A, B and C.
A ......................................................................................................................................................................
B ......................................................................................................................................................................
C ................................................................................................................................................................. [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 106

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Fetch-Execute Cycle:
At its core, all the computer ever does is, execute one instruction in memory after another, over and
over. Although there are many different possible (assembly language) instructions that the computer
can execute, the basic steps involved in executing an instruction are always the same, and they are
called the instruction cycle.
1. Fetch the instruction (transfer the instruction from main memory to the decoder)
2. Decode the instruction (from machine language)
3. Execute the instruction (e.g., add, divide, load, store...)
4.Store the result (for instructions like ADD, place the 'answer' in the specified register.)

The control unit guides the computer's components through this cycle to execute one instruction.
When that instruction is done, the cycle starts all over again with the next instruction.
Registers/circuits involved
The circuits used in the CPU during the cycle are:
x Program Counter (PC) - an incrementing counter that keeps track of the next memory
address of the instruction that is to be executed once the execution of the current
instruction is completed.
x Memory Address Register (MAR) - the address in main memory that is currently being
read or written
x Memory Buffer Register (MBR) - a two-way register that holds data fetched from memory
(and ready for the CPU to process) or data waiting to be stored in memory
x Current Instruction register (CIR) - a temporary holding ground for the instruction that has
just been fetched from memory
x Accumulator Register (ACC)is used for storing data for ALU to process and the results
those are produced by the ALU.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 107

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
x Control Unit (CU) - decodes the program instruction in the CIR, selecting machine
resources such as a data source register and a particular arithmetic operation, and
coordinates activation of those resources
x Arithmetic logic unit (ALU) - performs mathematical and logical operations

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 108

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 109

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 110

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
4 )LOOLQWKHIROORZLQJWDEOHXVLQJDVVHPEO\ODQJXDJHFRGHJLYHQRQSUHYLRXVSDJH
'HVFULSWLRQ 3& 0$5 0'5 &,5 'HFRGHU $&& $/8

Q 4) Test Yourself The table shows six stages in the von Neumann fetch-execute cycle. [6]
Description of stage Sequence No
the instruction is copied from the Memory Data Register (MDR) and placed
in the Current Instruction Register (CIR)
the instruction is executed
the instruction is decoded
the address contained in the Program Counter (PC) is copied to the Memory
Address Register (MAR)
the value in the Program Counter (PC) is incremented so that it points to the
next instruction to be fetched
the instruction is copied from the memory location contained in the Memory
Address Register (MAR) and is placed in the Memory Data Register (MDR)

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 111

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Register Transfer Notation

To describe the cycle we can use register notation. This is a very simple way of noting all the
steps involved. In all cases brackets e.g. [PC], means that the contents of the thing inside the
brackets are loaded. In the case of the first line, the contents of the program counter are loaded
into the Memory Address Register.

MAR Å [PC]
MBR Å [Memory] ; PCÅ [PC] +1 (Increment the PC for next cycle at the same time)
CIR Å [MBR]
CIR sends instruction to Decoder of control unit
Decoder decodes
Or ACCÅ [MBR]
ACC sends data to ALU
ALU executes
Q 5a) Complete the following diagrams showing each step of the fetch decode execute cycle:

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 112

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
b) The fetch-execute cycle is shown in register transfer notation.
01 MAR Å[PC]
02 PC Å[PC] - 1
03 MDR Å[MAR]
04 CIR Å[MAR]
There are three errors in the fetch-execute cycle shown.
Identify the line number of each error and give the correction.
Line number ......................................................................................................................................
Correction .........................................................................................................................................
Line number ......................................................................................................................................
Correction .........................................................................................................................................
Line number .......................................................................................................................................
Correction ...................................................................................................................................... [3]
Q 6) The contents of some special-purpose registers change as the program is executed.
Complete the trace table for the fetching of the first program instruction (867A):
• Show how the contents of the registers change.
• Put a tick in the address bus and/or data bus column to show when there is a signal change on
each bus. [5]
Special purpose registers
Buses
(Contents shown in hex)
Fetch stage
Address Data
PC MAR MDR CIR
bus bus
58
MAR Å [PC]
PC Å [PC] + 1
MDR Å[[MAR]]
CIR Å [MDR]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 113

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
4 6ROYHWKHSURJUDPVKRZQEHORZ

Address Contents Keys: Address Contents

1 LDA 15  /'$ 1 1010 15
2 ADD 14  $'' 2 1111 14
3 SUB 13  68% 3 0000 13
4 ADD 12  672 4 1111 12
5 ADD 13  (1' 5 1111 13
6 SUB #5 6 0000 #5
7 ADD #90 7 1111 #90
8 STO 10 8 0111 10
9 END 9 1100
10 10
11 55 11 55
12 10 12 10
13 5 13 5
14 50 14 50
15 150 15 150

Instruction No PC MAR MDR CIR ACC ALU 1010

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 114

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Q 8) The sequence of operations shows, in register transfer notation, the fetch stage of the fetch-
execute cycle.
1 MARÅ[PC]
2 PC Å[PC] + 1
3 MDR Å[[MAR]]
4 CIR Å[MDR]
• [register] denotes contents of the specified register or memory location
• step 1 above is read as “the contents of the Program Counter are copied to the Memory Address
Register”
(i) Describe what is happening at step 2.
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe what is happening at step 3.
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe what is happening at step 4.
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
Q 9) The following text includes a description of four stages of the fetch-execute cycle. Use the
terms below to complete the text:
Memory Data Register (MDR), Memory Address Register (MAR), Program Counter (PC),
Current Instruction Register(CIR), address, data bus, main memory, address bus.
The program instructions are stored in a continuous block of .................. .
The Program Counter stores the ........................................ of the next instruction to be fetched.
Stage 1: The contents of the Program Counter are copied to the ............................................
Stage 2: The contents of the .................................. are then incremented.
Stage 3: The value in the Memory Address Register is loaded to the........................ The data value
found at this address is loaded on to the........................... and copied to the ..................................
Stage 4: The contents of the Memory Data Register are copied to the............................... and. The
instruction can now be decoded and executed. [6]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 115

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Candidate Example response

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 116

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 117

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Topical Questions from Past Papers

4 F6XPPHU3
10 Several components are involved in processing an instruction in a Von Neumann model for a
computer system.
Three of these components are the arithmetic logic unit (ALU), control unit (CU) and random
access memory (RAM).
(a) Six statements are given about the components.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if each statement applies to the ALU, CU or the RAM. Some statements may
apply to more than one component. [6]
ALU CU RAM
Statement
(‫)ض‬ (‫)ض‬ (‫)ض‬
stores data and instructions before they enter the
central processing unit (CPU)
contains a register called the accumulator
manages the transmission of data and instructions to
the correct components
contained within the CPU
uses the data bus to send data into or out of the CPU
carries out calculations on data
(b) The accumulator is a register that is part of the Von Neumann model.
Give two other registers that are part of the Von Neumann model.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................ [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 118

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

3 9KPVGT2  Paige has a computer that has a central processing unit (CPU) based

on the Von Neumann model for a computer system.

(a) Identify the component within the CPU that controls the flow of data.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Identify the component within the CPU where calculations are carried out.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Identify the component within the CPU that stores the address of the next instruction to be
processed.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Identify the register within the CPU that holds an instruction that has been fetched from
memory.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Identify the register within the CPU that holds data that has been fetched from memory.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 119

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT2
7 (a) One of the key features of von Neumann computer architecture is the use of buses.
Three buses and three descriptions are shown below.
Draw a line to connect each bus to its correct description.

This bus carries signals used to

Address bus coordinate the computer’s activities

Control bus This bi-directional bus is used to

exchange data between processor,
memory and input/ output devices

Data bus
This uni-directional bus carries signals
relating to memory addresses between
processor and memory

(b) The seven stages in a von Neumann fetch-execute cycle are shown in the table below. Put
each stage in the correct sequence by writing the numbers 1 to 7 in the right hand column. The
first one has been done for you.

Stage Sequence
number
the instruction is then copied from the memory location contained in the MAR
(memory address register) and is placed in the MDR (memory data register)
the instruction is finally decoded and is then executed
the PC (program counter) contains the address of the next instruction to be 1
fetched
the entire instruction is then copied from the MDR (memory data register) and
placed in the CIR (current instruction register)
the address contained in the PC (program counter) is copied to the MAR
(memory address register) via the address bus
the address part of the instruction, if any, is placed in the MAR (memory
address register)
the value in the PC (program counter) is then incremented so that it points to
the next instruction to be fetched

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 120

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 /CTEJ2
8 (c) Computers based on the Von Neumann model, for a computer system, use interrupts.
Explain why interrupts are needed.
…................................................................................................................................................
…................................................................................................................................................
…................................................................................................................................................
….......................................................................................................................................... [2]

3 9KPVGT2
3 A section of computer memory is shown below:

Address Content
1000 0000 0110 1110
1000 0001 0101 0001
1000 0010 1000 1101
1000 0011 1000 1100
`

1000 1100
1000 1101
1000 1110
1000 1111

(a) (i) The contents of memory location 1000 0001 are to be read.
Show the contents of the Memory Address Register (MAR) and the Memory Data Register (MDR)
during this read operation: [2]

MAR

MDR

(ii) The value 0111 1001 is to be written into memory location 1000 1110.
Show the contents of the MAR and MDR during this write operation: [2]

MAR

MDR

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 121

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(iii) Show any changes to the computer memory following the read and write operations in part
(a)(i) and part (a)(ii). [1]

Address Content
1000 0000 0110 1110
1000 0001 0101 0001
1000 0010 1000 1101
1000 0011 1000 1100
`

1000 1100
1000 1101
1000 1110
1000 1111

(b) Name three other registers used in computers.

1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The control unit is part of a computer system.
What is the function of the control unit?
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
................... [3]

3 9KPVGT2
1 To process an instruction, a central processing unit (CPU) goes through a cycle that has three
main stages.
Name each stage in this cycle.
Stage 1 ................................................................................
Stage 2 ................................................................................
Stage 3 ................................................................................ [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 122

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 9KPVGT2
6 Four computer terms and eight descriptions are shown below.
Draw lines to connect each computer term to the correct description(s). [4]

Computer term Description

Arithmetic and
Data can be read but not altered
logic unit (ALU)

Carries out operations such as

addition and multiplication
Control unit
Stores bootstrap loader and BIOS

Fetches each instruction in turn

Random access
memory (RAM)
Carries out operations such as AND,
OR, NOT

Stores part of the operating system

currently in use

Read only memory

Stores data currently in use
(ROM)

Manages execution of each instruction

3 5WOOGT2
1 Name three different buses that are used in the fetch-execute cycle.
Bus 1 .................................................................................................................................
Bus 2 .................................................................................................................................
Bus 3 ........................................................................................................................... [3]
Examiner Comment on Q 1
Many candidates provided three correct busses. The most common incorrect answer was candidatesproviding fetch, decode and execute, which
demonstrated a misunderstanding of the question.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 123

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 9KPVGT2
4 Six components of a computer system and six descriptions are shown.
Draw a line to match each component with the most suitable description. [5]
Component Description
Arithmetic Logic Unit Used to connect together the
(ALU) internal components of the CPU.

Used to carry out calculations on

Buses
data.

Used to temporarily hold data and

Control Unit(CU)
instructions during processing.

Immediate Access Used to allow interaction with the

Store (IAS) computer.

Used to hold data and

Input/ Output instructions before they are
processed.

Used to manage the flow of data

Registers
through the CPU.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 124

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 /CTEJ2 +PFKC 

10 The table shows a segment of primary memory from a Von Neumann model computer.
Address Contents
10001 11001101
10010 11110001
10011 10101111
10100 10000110
10101 00011001
10110 10101100
The program counter contains the data 10010.

(a) (i) State the data that will be placed in the memory address register (MAR).

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the data that will be placed in the memory data register (MDR).

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Describe the stored program concept when applied to the Von Neumann model.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................[4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 125

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT2Six components of the Von Neumann model for a computer system an
d six descriptions are given. Draw a line to match each component to the most suitable description
. [5]
%QORQPGPV &GUETKRVKQP
Holds data and instructions when they
Immediate access
are loaded from main memory and
store(IAS)
are waiting to be processed.

Holds data temporarily that is

Register
currently being used in a calculation.

Control unit(CU) Holds data or instructions temporarily

when they are being processed.

Accumulator(ACC) Manages the flow of data and

interaction between the components
of the processor.

Arithmetic logic unit

(ALU) Carries out the calculations on data.

Pathway for transmitting data and

Bus
instructions.
3 5WOOGT2
6 Kelvin correctly answers an examination question about the Von Neumann model.
Eight different terms have been removed from his answer.
Complete the sentences in Kelvin’s answer, using the list given. Not all items in the list need to be
used.
• accumulator (ACC) • address bus • arithmetic logic unit (ALU) • control unit (CU)
• data bus • executed • fetches • immediate access store
(IAS)
• memory address register (MAR) • saved • memory data register (MDR)
• program counter (PC) • transmits
The central processing unit (CPU) ....................................................................................the data
and instructions needed and stores them in the.............................................................................. to
wait to be processed. The .................................................................................... holds the address
of the next instruction. This address is sent to the
.................................................................................... The data from this address is sent to the
.............................................................................. .
The instruction can then be decoded and ............................................................................. .Any
calculations that are carried out on the data are done by the

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 126

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
.............................................................. . During calculations, the data is temporarily held in a
register called the ............................................[8]

3 9KPVGT2
11 The fetch-execute cycle make use of registers.
(a) Describe the role of the Program Counter (PC).
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe the role of the Memory Data Register (MDR).
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [2]

3 5WOOGT2

3 Vanessa writes a paragraph as an answer to an examination question about the central

processing unit (CPU). Use the list given to complete Vanessa’s answer by inserting the correct
six missing terms. Not all terms will be used.
• Components • Data • Decoded • Executed • Fetched
• Instructions • RAM • ROM • Secondary storage
The CPU processes ........................................................ and ........................................................ .
An instruction is ........................................................ from ........................................................ into
the CPU where it is then ........................................................ . Once this has taken place the
instruction is then ........................................................ . [6]

3 9KPVGT2
7 The Von Neumann model for a computer system has several components that are used in the
fetch-execute cycle. (a) One component is main memory.
(i) Describe what is meant by main memory and how it is used in the Von Neumann model for a
computer system.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 127

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(ii) State two other components in the Von Neumann model for a computer system.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Computer systems often use interrupts. Tick (9) to show if each statement is True or False.[5]
Statement True (9) False (9)
Interrupts can be hardware based or software based
Interrupts are handled by the operating system
Interrupts allow a computer to multitask
Interrupts work out which program to give priority to
Interrupts are vital to a computer and it cannot function without them

3 9KPVGT2 2 The Von Neumann model for a computer system uses several

components in the fetch-execute cycle. One component that is used is the Control Unit (CU).
Identify four other components that are used in the Von Neumann model for a computer system.
1 .......................................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................................
3 .......................................................................................................................................................
4 .................................................................................................................................................... [4]

3 5WOOGT2
1 (b) (ii) Identify the component of the CPU that is responsible for decoding instructions.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
3 C5WOOGT25 Six components of a computer are given.
Some are part of the central processing unit (CPU) of the Von Neumann model for a computer system.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if each component is a CPU component or is Not a CPU component. [6]

CPU Not a CPU

Component
component (‫)ض‬ component (‫)ض‬
Arithmetic logic unit (ALU)
Hard disk drive (HDD)
Memory address register (MAR)
Random access memory (RAM)
Solid state drive (SSD)
Control unit (CU)

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 128

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Chapter 5

1.3.3 & 1.3.4 Input & Output Devices

Have Read
To Revise

Prepared
To Read
Learning Outcome

Have
1.3.3: Input devices
Describe the principles of operation (how each device works) of these input
devices: 2D and 3D scanners, barcode readers, Quick Response (QR) code readers,
digital cameras, keyboards, mice, touch screens, interactive whiteboard,
microphones
Describe how these principles are applied to real-life scenarios, for example:
scanning of passports at airports, barcode readers at supermarket checkouts, and
touch screens on mobile devices
Describe how a range of sensors can be used to input data into a computer
system, including light, temperature, magnetic field, gas, pressure, moisture,
humidity, ph and motion
Describe how these sensors are used in real-life scenarios, for example: street
lights, security devices, pollution control, games, and household and industrial
applications
1.3.4: Output devices
Describe the principles of operation of a range of output devices, including: inkjet,
laser and 3D printers; 2D and 3D cutters; speakers and headphones; actuators;
flat-panel display screens, including Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and Light-Emitting
Diodes (LED); and LCD projectors and Digital Light Projectors (DLP)
Describe how these principles are applied to real-life scenarios, for example:
printing single items on demand or in large volumes; use of small screens on
mobile devices

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 129

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Input Devices:
Input devices allow us to enter raw data into a computer. The
computer processes the data and then produces outputs that we
can understand using an output device. Input devices can be
manual or automatic.
Two-dimensional scanners
2D scanners are input devices used to make digital copies of
documents or pictures, but can also be used to create a 2D image
of other objects as well.
How 2D Scanner works:

1 Cover is raised
2 Document is placed in on glass panel and cover is closed
3 A bright light illuminates the documents lamp like xenon which produce very bright white light
4 A scan head moves across the document. An image is produced.
5 The image is sent to a lens using series of mirrors. The lens focuses the document image.
6 The focused image fall onto a charge couple device (CCD) which consists of number of ICs
7 CCD is made up of light-sensitive elements (pixels). Each element of CCD creates an
electric charge when light falls on it and the scanned image is converted into digital form.
8 Software produces digital image from electronic form
How 3D Scanner works:
Scanners shines a laser (or light) over the surface of a 3D object
– Records measurements of the geometry/dimensions of the object
– Measurements are converted to digital file
– Produces a 3D digital
Bar Code Reader/Scanner
How it works
Stage Description
1 The barcode is first read by a red laser or red LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE).
2 Light is reflected back off the barcode; the dark areas reflect little or no light which
allows the bars to be read.
3 The reflected light is read by sensors (photoelectric cells).
4 As the laser or LED light is scanned across the barcode, a pattern is generated
which is converted into digital data – this allows the computer to understand the
barcode.
5 For example: the digit ‘3’ on the left generates the pattern L D DDD L D (where L =
light and D = dark); this has the binary equivalent of 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 (where L =0 and
D = 1
6 If barcode are not scanned correctly the bar code number is types in manually
using keyboard

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 130

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
When barcode has been read, then what happens?
• The barcode number is looked up in the stock database (the barcode is known as the KEY FIELD
in the stock item record); this key field uniquely identifies each stock item.
• When the barcode number is found, the stock item record is looked up.
• The price and other stock item details are sent back to the checkout (or POINT OFSALE
TERMINAL (POS)).
• The number of stock items in the record is reduced by one each time the barcode is read.
• This new value for number of stock items is written back to the stock item record.
• The number of stock items is compared to the re-order level; if it is less than or equal to this
value, more stock items are automatically ordered.
• Once an order for more stock items is generated, a flag is added to the record to stop re-ordering
every time the stock item barcode is read.
• When new stock items arrive, the stock levels are updated in the database.
The following flowchart shows how barcodes are used at the point of sale in an automatic stock
control system.

Quick response (QR) codes

QR code (abbreviated from Quick Response Code) is the trademark for a type of matrix barcode (or
two-dimensional barcode).
Structure
A QR code consists of black squares arranged in a square grid on a white background.
1. The position detection pattern consists of three identical structures that are located in all
corners of the QR Code except the bottom right corner.
2. Alignment marker supports the decoder software in compensating for moderate image
distortions.
3. Data area has data, converted into a bit stream and then stored in 8 bit parts (called code
words).
How it Works

x Camera on smart phones are used to Read/scan

QR codes using app
x The camera is used to scan/capture the image of
QR code
x Position direction pattern and alignment marker are
used to define the alignment
x Black squares reflect less light while white squares
reflect more light
x The app on mobile device processes the image
x Each small square/pixel is converted to a binary value
The following QR Code at left stores web address http://www.inqilabpatel.com while QR Code at
right stores contact information of Inqilab Patel

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 131

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Applications
Applications include product tracking, item identification, time tracking, document management,
and general marketing.
Keyboard
The keyboard is the piece of computer hardware used to input text, characters, and other
commands into a computer or similar device.
How it works
S No Step
1. Uses switches and circuits to translate keystrokes into signals the computer can
understand
2. The key matrix is a grid of circuits / three layers of plastic underneath the keys
3. Each circuit is broken beneath the key / middle layer contains holes
4. When key pressed, a circuit is made / completed and a signal is sent
5. Processor compares location of signal from key matrix to a character map stored on
ROM
6. A character code for each key press is saved in a keyboard buffer
Each individual key is a switch. When a key is pressed it
generates a specific binary code, based on ASCII. For
example:
¾ Pressing A key produces binary code 01100001,
representing lower case letter a,
¾ This binary code is sent to processor.
So processor recognises which key is pressed
Drawback:
Keyboard is the easiest way to enter text into a
computer but it has some drawbacks too, for example:
x It is a relatively slow method of data entry.
x It is prone to errors.
x Frequent use of it can lead to injuries, such as REPETITIVE STRAIN INJURY(RSI) in the
hands and wrists.
Ergonomic keyboards are designed to give more support to the wrists and hands when
doing a lot of typing.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 132

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

Mouse:
A computer mouse is a handheld hardware input device that
controls a cursor in a GUI and can move and
select text, icons, files, and folders.
The more traditional type with a mechanical ball arrangement;
connected to the computer through a USB port while the more
modern type (optical mouse) that use red LEDs to detect movement in the x-y direction.
How optical mouse works:
S No Step
1 laser/light shines onto a surface through a (polished) ring at the base
2 the light is reflected from the surface through the ring
3 sensor detects reflected light
4 capturing details/photograph of surface (under the ring) at about 1500 times per second
5 as the mouse moves the sensor detects changes in the surface detail/photograph
6 These changes are translated into movement (change of x and y co-ordinates)
7 the computer/software updates the position of the cursor on the screen
Digital camera
A digital camera is an input device that captures images (and sometimes video)
digitally. Digital cameras use an image sensor chip to capture the image, rather than the film
used by a traditional camera.
Benefits over traditional camera
x Digital cameras produce photographs for transfer to a computer directly or to print out by
connecting directly to a printer.
x Many digital cameras also allow short video clips to be produced.
x Photographs can be uploaded directly into applications software such as word processors,
desktop publishers, etc.
x Modern digital cameras simply link to a computer system via a USB port or by using Bluetooth
(which enables wireless transfer of photographic files).
How digital camera works
Digital camera uses microprocessor, lenses, pixels and storage. The photograph is captured when
light passes through the lens onto a light sensitive cell. This cell is made up of tiny elements
known as pixels. The number of pixels determines the size of the file used to store the photograph
(e.g. a 14- megapixel camera will need 42 megabytes to store each raw photograph).

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 133

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
How captured images are converted into digital photo files
¾ Captured image is sent to DAC to convert it from analogue to digital (using ADC)
¾ Image is turned into pixels
¾ Each pixel is given a binary value
¾ Pixels form a grid (to create the image)
¾ Each pixel has a colour
¾ Pixels are stored in sequence (in a file)
¾ Meta data is stored (to describe the dimensions/resolution of the image), it stores the
dimensions/colour depth .etc.
¾ For example JPEG
Role of microprocessor
Microprocessor can automatically carry out the following tasks:
x adjust the shutter speed
x focus the image automatically
x operate the flash automatically
x adjust the aperture size
x adjust the size of the image
x remove ‘red eye’ when the flash has been used
Factors effecting quality of photographs
The quality of the photograph also depends on many other factors, such as:
x the type of lens used
x the lighting
Mobile phone using digital camera
Mobile phones have caught up with digital cameras as regards number of pixels.
Drawback of camera in mobile phone
Mobile phones usually have poor lens quality and limited memory for the storage of photos.
Microphone:
A microphone is an input device used to enter sound into a computer.
The sound can be used for
x Voice over for a presentation
x Voice recognition for security system
x Speech recognition for speech-to-text software
x For disabled person.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 134

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
How to capture sound:
To record a sound microphone is used.
Microphone has a diaphragm. Diaphragm is attached with a moveable coil. Inside this movable coil
there is fixed magnet.
When sound waves strike diaphragm, causes vibration in it and the movable coil starts moving to a
nd fro around fixed magnet. This movement generates electrical signals. And in this way sound is c
aptured.

Conversion of Analogue Sound into Digital Format:

Sound waves are analogue values, these analogue values are converted into digital values to
manipulate and to store in computer.
ADC (Analogue to Digital Converter) is used to convert analogue sound waves into digital values.
This conversion is done in following steps.

Firstly, a filter removes non-audible sound waves. Humans can hear sounds in a frequency
range from about 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
Then sound waves are sampled at a given time rate (Sound waves are broken down
thousands of smaller parts (samples) per second.)
The height/amplitude of each sound wave is determined.
Approximation is used when necessary.
At last sound wave values are stored in binary digits, depending upon number of bits per sample.
Voice Recognition Speech Recognition
In voice recognition system, the user’s voice In Speech Recognition the spoken words are
is detected and then converted into digital. recognised and shown on a screen, input into a
word processor or used in other application.
A few words spoken produce a digital wave Speech recognition is language dependent
pattern. Software compares this wave
pattern to wave patterns stored in memory
to see if they match. If they match, then the
person has been correctly identified.
This technology can be used in security It is used to give commands by speaking to
systems. computer or in speech-to-text software

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 135

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Touch Sensitive Screens
The majority of mobile phones use touch screens. The
majority of mobile phones use touch screens.
Three common technologies are used by different
mobile phone manufacturers:
„ resistive
„ capacitive
„ infrared

Differences between touch screens

Resistive Capacitive Infra Red

Hardware The screen of resistive In a capacitive system, a Infrared touch screens are
system includes a glass transparent material that based on light-beam
panel covered with a thin stares an electrical charge interruption technology.
metallic layer made of a covers the screen's glass Instead of an overlay on the
substance that conducts panel. surface, a frame surrounds
electricity. Spacers on the the display. The frame has
layer support a metallic layer light sources, or light emitting
that resists the flow of diodes (LEDs) on one side
electricity. and light detectors on the
opposite side, creating an
optical grid across the
screen.
How it When you touch the screen ¾ The screen has ¾ Infrared rays are sent
works with your finger or a stylus, conductive layer across screen (from the
the two layers make contact, ¾ An electrostatic/electric edges) and captured by
changing the electrical field field is created on the sensors at the opposite side
produced by the layers. This screen ¾ Infrared rays form a grid
permits the computer to ¾ Sensor(s) (around the across the screen
calculate the coordinates of screen) monitor the ¾ Infrared ray is broken when
the contact. electrostatic field someone touches screen by
¾ When touched a finger blocking a beam
(electrostatic) charge is ¾ This signal is converted into
transferred to finger digital by ADC
¾ Location of touch is ¾ The digital signal is sent
calculated // Co- to processor which
ordinates used to calculate (on where beam
calculate touch is broken) to locate the
‘touch’

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 136

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Resistive Capacitive Infra Red

¾ Co-ordinates are used to

locate the touch
Finger can use stylus/ finger/ Can’t use gloved finger can use stylus/ finger/ gloved
Touch gloved finger/pen finger/pen

Visibility poor visibility in sunlight good visibility in sunlight Fairly good

in sunlight

Cost Inexpensive Medium cost Expensive

Durability − vulnerable to scratching Durable Good durability

− wears through time

Touch screen technologies can be described as resistive or capacitive.

Six statements are given about resistive and capacitive technology. [6]
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if the statement applies to Resistive or Capacitive and/or Infrared technology.
Resistive Capacitive Infrared
Statement
(‫)ض‬ (‫)ض‬ (‫)ض‬
This touch screen has multi-touch capabilities
This touch screen cannot be used whilst wearing gloves
This touch screen is made up of two layers with a small space
in between
This touch screen uses the electrical properties of the human
body
This touch screen is normally cheaper to manufacture
This touch screen has a quicker response time

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 137

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 138

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 139

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Interactive White Board:
An interactive whiteboard (IWB) is a large interactive display in the form factor of a whiteboard.
It can either be a standalone touchscreen computer used independently to perform tasks and
operations, or a connectable apparatus used as a touchpad to control computers from a projector.
How interactive whiteboard Works
A device driver is usually installed on the attached computer so
that the interactive whiteboard can act as a Human Input Device
(HID), like a mouse.
The computer's video output is connected to a digital projector so
that images may be projected on the interactive whiteboard
surface.
The user then calibrates the whiteboard image by matching the position of the projected image in
reference to the whiteboard using a pointer as necessary.
After this, the pointer or other device may be used to activate programs, buttons and menus from
the whiteboard itself, just as one would ordinarily do with a mouse.
If text input is required, user can invoke an on-screen keyboard or, if the whiteboard software
provides for this, utilize handwriting recognition.
Thus, an IWB emulates both a mouse and a keyboard. The user can conduct a presentation or a
class almost exclusively from the whiteboard.
In addition, most IWBs are supplied with software that provides tools and features specifically
designed to maximize interaction opportunities. These generally include the ability to create virtual
versions of paper flipcharts, pen and highlighter options, and possibly even virtual rulers,
protractors, and compasses—instruments that would be used in traditional classroom teaching.
Uses for interactive whiteboards may include:
x Running software that is loaded onto the connected PC, such as a web browsers or other
software used in the classroom.
x Capturing and saving notes written on a whiteboard to the connected PC
x Capturing notes written on a graphics tablet connected to the whiteboard
x Controlling the PC from the white board using click and drag, mark up which annotates
a program or presentation
x Using OCR software to translate cursive writing on a graphics tablet into text
x Using an Audience Response System so that presenters can poll a classroom audience or
conduct quizzes, capturing feedback onto the whiteboard

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 140

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Monitoring System
In monitoring systems microprocessor just examine sensors’ reading and report their results.
Control System
A control system is a type of computer system that manages, commands and directs other devices
or systems. There are open and closed loop control systems. They usually take an input, process
it and get an output.
A control system consists of Sensors, ADC, Processor, DAC and Actuator.
Sensors and actuators are devices that are used for automatic input and control in real-time
systems.
Sensors is an input device which measures a specific physical quantity (input) and send the data
to processor. There are different types of sensors like, heat, infra-red, humidity, pressure, acoustic,
gas, bar code etc.
The signals generated by sensors are generally in analogue form and needed to be converted into
digital form so as processor can understand it. ADC (Analogue-to-Digital Converter) is used to
convert these analogue signals into digital signals.
Actuators is a hardware device that receives a signal from a computer and adjusts the setting of
a controlling device.
The processor sends digital signals, which are converted into analogue signals using DAC
(Digital-to-Analogue Converter) so as actuator can act upon it.
Actuator is responsible for powering and moving a motor in machinery, such as a robot arm in a
factory.

6HQVRU $'& 3URFHVVRU '$& $FWXDWRU

$QDORJX 'LJLWDO 'LJLWDO $QDORJX

For example in a furnace, a sensor is used to measure temperature in the furnace and it sends
readings in analogue form (small electric currents/voltages). This data is converted into digital by
an ADC and is fed to a computer, which compares the input temperature with the required
temperature stored on a file. If any action is needed (furnace temperature is too low or too high)
then a digital signal is sent out from the computer. This signal is converted into an electric
current/voltage (i.e. analogue) so that the valve can be regulated (i.e. opened or closed to control
the gas supply and hence the furnace temperature).

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 141

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

Feedback System
Control systems can be open loop or closed loop.
Open loop Feedback systems will just consider the input and then keep repeating the same task
given the input, e.g. a microwave heats for a given time period without actually checking the
temperature of the food.
Closed loop Feedback systems on the other hand will also take into account other factors,
including the output itself. A furnace is a closed-loop feedback system.
Above furnace system is a closed-loop feedback system. In this system temperature sensor
measures temperature in the furnace and it sends readings to processor, which compares the
input temperature with the required temperature stored on a file. If any action is needed (furnace
temperature is too low or too high) then a digital signal is sent out from the processor. Actuator
regulates the valves (i.e. opened or closed to control the gas supply and hence the furnace
temperature). Then sensor again measures the temperature which is actually itself the output of
the system. On the basis of new readings processor decides new actions. Means new actions
depends upon the results of previous actions.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 142

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Sensors (general) in control and measuring applications
infra-red/motion automatic doors, burglar alarm systems
Temperature Automatic washing machines, automatic cookers, central heating
sensor controllers, computer-controlled greenhouses, scientific experiments and
environmental monitoring, oven.
Sound/acoustic Burglar alarm, Leak detection system, Disco lighting
Moisture/humidity Clothes drier, Environmental control
Pressure sensor Burglar alarms, automatic washing machines, robotics, production line
control, scientific experiments and environmental monitoring
carbon dioxide/ pollution monitoring in a river , greenhouse environment (growth control),
oxygen/gas confined area (e.g. space craft)
Fish tank/Aquarium
Light sensor Computer controlled greenhouses, burglar alarm systems, robotics,
production line control, scientific experiments and environmental
monitoring
Graphics tablet Inputting freehand drawings or retouch photographs
Optical Mark Inputting pencil marks on a form such as a school register, candidate
Reader exam answers, any application involving input of a choice of options
Optical Character Inputting text to a computer ready for processing by another software
Reader package such as word processors, spread sheets, databases etc.
Bar code Reader Inputting code numbers from products at a POS terminal, library books
and membership numbers

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 143

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Monitoring applications
Burglar alarm system

A burglar alarm monitoring system will carry out the following actions:
• The system is activated by keying in a password on a keypad.
• The infra-red sensor picks up the movement of an intruder in the building.
• The acoustic sensor picks up sounds such as footsteps or breaking glass.
• The pressure sensor picks up the weight of an intruder coming through a door or through a
window.
• The sensor data is passed through an ADC if it is in an analogue form to produce digital data.
• The computer/microprocessor will sample the digital data coming from these sensors at a
given frequency (e.g. every five seconds); the data is compared with the stored values by the
computer/microprocessor.
• If any of the incoming data values are outside the acceptable range, then the computer
sends a signal to:
• a siren to sound the alarm, or
• a light to start flashing.
• A DAC is used if the devices need analogue values to operate them.
• The alarm continues to sound/lights continue to flash until the system is reset with a password.
Monitoring of patients in a hospital
• A number of sensors are attached to the patient; these measure vital signs such as:
temperature, heart rate, breathing rate, etc.
• These sensors are all attached to a computer system.
• The sensors constantly send data back to the computer system.
• The computer samples the data at frequent intervals.
• The range of acceptable values for each parameter is keyed in to the computer.
• The computer compares the values from the sensors with those values keyed in.
• If anything is out of the acceptable range, a signal is sent by the computer to sound an alarm.
• If data from the sensors is within range, the values are shown in either graphical form on a
screen and/or a digital read out.
• Monitoring continues until the sensors are disconnected from the patient.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 144

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Control of street lighting
1. sensor sends signal/data to the microprocessor
2. signal/data converted to digital/using ADC
3. microprocessor compares value to a stored value
4. if input value < stored value …
a. signal sent from microprocessor to actuator
b. and light is switched on/off
5. whole process continues in an infinite loop
6. To Avoid frequent on/off switches:
7. microprocessor continues to keep light on/off for a
pre-determined period
8. after pre-determined period, sensor output is again
sampled

Controlling Security Lights

– infrared / motion / pressure (sensor) // sensor detects movement/pressure
– signals/data sent (continuously) to microprocessor
– converted from analogue to digital (using ADC)
– microprocessor compares value with those stored in memory
– if sensor value does not match the stored value(s) …
– … signal sent to switch on the light
– … signal sent to keep the light on
– … light remains on for a period of time (30 seconds)
– if sensor value matches the stored value(s) …
– … light will remain off
– … will turn off after period of time (30 seconds)
– works in a continues loop

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 145

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
The following flowchart shows how a light sensor and microprocessor are used to switch a street
lamp on or off. When the sensor reading is <= 50 light units, the lamp is turned on automatically.
Several of the instructions have been omitted from the flowchart.
Using item numbers only from the list below, complete the flowchart:[5]

Item Instruction
number
1 Count down in minutes
2 Is light reading <= 50?
3 Is street lamp already on?
4 Is time = 0?
5 The microprocessor compares the
sensor reading with stored values
6 The sensor reading is sent to the
microprocessor
7 Switch the street lamp off
8 Switch street lamp on
9 Time set to 10 minutes

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 146

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEMS (ABS) on cars use magnetic field sensors to stop the wheels
locking up on the car if the brakes have been applied too sharply.
• When one of the car wheels rotates too slowly (i.e. it is locking up), a magnetic field
sensor sends data to a microprocessor.
• The microprocessor checks the rotation speed of the other three wheels.
• If they are different (i.e. rotating faster), the microprocessor sends a signal to the braking
system:
• and the braking pressure to the affected wheel is reduced
• the wheel’s rotational speed is then increased to match the other wheels.
• Checking the rotational speed using these magnetic field sensors is done several times a
second and the braking pressure to all the wheels can be constantly changing to prevent
any of the wheels locking up under heavy braking; this is felt as a ‘judder’ on the brake
pedal as the braking system is constantly switched off and on to equalise the rotational
speed of all four wheels.
• If one of the wheels is rotating too quickly, braking pressure is increased to that wheel
until it matches the other three.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 147

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 148

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 149

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 150

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
D6XPPHU3
5 Jamelia has a greenhouse that she uses to grow fruit and vegetables. She needs to make sure
the temperature in the greenhouse stays between 25°C and 30°C (inclusive).
A system that has a temperature sensor and a microprocessor is used to maintain the temperature
in the greenhouse. The system will:
• open a window and turn a heater off if it gets too hot
• close a window and turn a heater on if it gets too cold.
Describe how the system uses the temperature sensor and the microprocessor to maintain the
temperature in the greenhouse.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [8]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 151

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
E6XPPHU3
5 A security light system is used by a factory. The light only comes on when it is dark and when
movement is detected. The light will stay on for 1 minute before switching off.
Sensors and a microprocessor are used to control the security light system.
(a) Identify two sensors that would be used in the security light system.
Sensor 1 ...................................................................................................................................
Sensor 2 ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe how the sensors and the microprocessor control the security light system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [8]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 152

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

F6XPPHU3
9 An underground car park has a system that checks the height of vehicles. A vehicle can be no
higher than 1.8 metres to enter the car park.
The system also counts the number of vehicles that have entered the car park, so that it can
display how many parking spaces are still available.
Each parking space has a red and a green light above it. If a car is parked in the parking space
only the red light is on, otherwise only the green light is on.
Sensors and a microprocessor are used to control the system.
(a) Complete the table to identify a suitable sensor for each part of the system. [3]
Task Sensor
check if a vehicle is too high
count the vehicles entering the car park
check if a vehicle is parked in a parking space

(b) Describe how the sensor and the microprocessor are used to display the red or green light
above the parking space.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 153

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 154

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Output Devices
An output device is any piece of computer hardware equipment used to communicate the results
of data processing carried out by an information processing system (such as a computer) which
converts the electronically generated information into human-readable form.
Soft Copy: The output displayed on screen or stored in storage devices is soft copy.
Hard Copy: The output printed on paper is hardcopy output.
Inkjet Printer
How inkjet printers work:

S# Step
1 Printer driver translates data into a suitable format for the printer
2 Printer receives data from the computer and stores the data in the printer's buffer
3 Paper feed stepper motor activated; sheet of paper fed from paper tray
4 The print head moves across page; ink is sprayed each time the print head pauses
for a fraction of a second
5 The ink droplets are produced currently using two different technologies.
• Thermal bubble: tiny resistors create localised heat which makes the ink
vaporise. This causes the ink to form a tiny bubble; as the bubble expands, some
of the ink is ejected from the print head onto the paper. When the bubble
collapses, a small vacuum is created which allows fresh ink to be drawn into the
print head. This continues until the printing cycle is completed.
• Piezoelectric: a crystal is located at the back of the ink reservoir for each nozzle.
The crystal is given a tiny electric charge which makes it vibrate. This vibration
forces ink to be ejected onto the paper; at the same time more ink is drawn in for
further printing.
6 Paper feed stepper motor advances paper a fraction of a cm after each complete
head pass

Why inkjet printers are helping to reduce the cost of manufacturing OLED
screens?
Current OLED manufacturing methods rely on evaporation processes, in which the
organic materials are deposited onto a glass sheet through a thin metal stencil. But
in this method a significant amount of the material is wasted because it disperses all
over the mask.
Inkjet OLED printing has the desirable ability to allow precision deposits without the
use of a mask. This could be done, for example, by placing OLED pixels on glass or
plastic using a portable platform and nozzles in regular atmospheric conditions. Such
methods have the potential to increase yields and lower prices.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 155

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

Laser Printer
Laser printers produce very high-quality hard copy output. The print rate per page is very quick if
a large number of pages are being printed. They rely on large buffer memories, where the data for
the whole document is stored before the pages can be printed out.
How it works
S
Step
No
1 The printer driver ensures that the data is in a format that the laser printer can understand
2 Data is then sent to the laser printer and stored temporarily in the printer buffer
3 The printing drum is given a positive charge
4 As the printing drum rotates, a laser scans across it; this removes the positive charge in
certain areas
5 Negatively-charged areas are then produced on the printing drum; these match exactly with
the text and images to be printed
6 The printing drum is coated in positively-charged toner; this then sticks to the negatively-
charged parts of the printing drum
7 A negatively-charged sheet of paper is then rolled over the printing drum
8 The toner on the printing drum is now transferred to the paper to reproduce the required text
and images
9 The paper goes through a fuser which melts the toner so it fixes permanently to the paper

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 156

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Uses
x Laser printers are used where noise levels need to be kept low (e.g. in an office).
x They are the best option for fast high quality high volume printing.
Advantages
x Printing is fast for high volumes. If only a few pages are to be printed they are little faster than
inkjet printers.
x They can handle very large print jobs.
x The quality is consistently high.
x Toner cartridges last for a long time, so laser printers can be a cost effective option, particularly
if colour outputs are not required.
Disadvantages
x Laser printers are expensive to buy.
x They are only really fast if several copies are being made.
x Colour laser printers tend to be expensive to run, since four cartridges (three colours plus
black) are needed as well as diffuser kits, etc.
x They produce ozone and volatile organic compounds because of their method of printing and
type of toner/ink used. These have been linked to health hazards in the office.
Q (a) (i) The following sequence of steps (1 to 7) describe how a single page is printed on a laser
printer.
The statements A, B, C and D are used to complete the sequence.
The paper passes through a fuser, which heats up the paper. The toner melts and
A
forms a permanent image on the paper.
B The electrical charge is removed from the drum and the excess toner is collected.
C The image is converted on the drum into an electrostatic charge.
The oppositely-charged paper picks up the toner particles from the drum. After
D
picking up the toner, the paper is discharged to stop it clinging to the drum.
Complete the sequence by writing one of the letters A, B, C or D on the appropriate row.
1.A laser beam and a rotating mirror are used to draw an image of the page on the photosensitive
drum.
2. .........................
3. Electrostatic charge attracts toner.
4. The charged paper is rolled against the drum.
5. .........................
6. .........................
7. ......................... [3]
(ii) A computer user has a laser printer to print letters and documents. The user also prints digital p
hotographs taken using a digital camera.
State the most suitable type of printer for printing the photographs.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 157

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Q) The first column of the following table gives features of different types of printer.
Put a tick (3) in the cells to show which features describe a laser and an inkjet printer. [2]

Type of printer
Laser Inkjet
Impact printer
Non-impact printer
Line printer
Page printer

3D Printer

3D printing is any of various processes in which material is joined or solidified under computer
control to create a three-dimensional object, with material being added together. 3D printing is
used in both rapid prototyping and additive manufacturing.

The following describes some of the features of 3D printing:

Various types of 3D printers exist; they range from the size of a microwave oven up to the size of a
small car.

3D printers use ADDITIVE manufacturing (i.e. the object is built up layer by layer);

Direct 3D printing uses inkjet technology; a print head can move left to right as in a normal
printer. However, the print head can also move up and down to build up the layers of an object.

Binder 3D printing is similar to direct 3D printing. However, this method uses

two passes for each of the layers; the first pass sprays dry powder and then on the second pass a
binder (a type of glue) is sprayed to form a solid layer.

Newer technologies are using lasers and UV light to harden liquid polymers; this further increases
the diversity of products which can be made.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 158

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
How 3D Printer Works

The steps 1 to 9 describe the basic internal operation of a 3D printer.

The following five statements are used to complete the
sequence of steps.
1. The object is designed using Computer Aided Design (CAD)
software
2. The software splits the object into slices.
3. The data about the slices is sent to the printer
4. The solid plastic is melted and transferred to the nozzle
5. A stepper motor moves the nozzle into position
6. The nozzle extrudes the molten plastic
7. The steps 5 to 6 are repeated until the layer is complete
8. A fan cools the layer
9. The steps 4 to 8 are repeated for each subsequent layer

Uses
x 3D printers are used to produce prototypes which actually work from CAD packages,
photograph images, stored drawings, etc.
x Scale models are produced in colour before the real thing is manufactured.
x The ultimate objective is to produce organic objects (such as replacement human organs)
using this layering technology.
Advantages
x 3D printers save a lot of money, since making prototypes by other methods is very time
consuming and expensive.
x Physical scale models are produced with working parts, which gives a better idea of how the
end product will look.
x The powders used can often be ground up and re-used.
Disadvantages
x 3D printers are expensive to buy.
x They are slow at producing their output.
x The end product can sometimes be a little rough and often needs further work to be done on it.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 159

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
2D & 3D Cutter
A 2d and 3d cutter is a high powered laser that cuts material such as thin metals or woods, used
mostly for industrial purposes.
2D cuts a sheet and 3D cutters cuts an object using high power laser beam.
Application:
3D laser cutters can cut the following materials:
• glass
• crystal
• metal
• polymer
• wood.
Benefits:
They make precise and clean cuts, it is also is very fast which makes it efficient.
Drawback:
The main disadvantage of laser cutting is the high power consumption.
Loudspeakers & Headphone
Loudspeakers and headphones are output devices which are used to output sound from computer.
Speakers and headphones consist of DAC (Digital to Analogue Converter), Amplifier and
diaphragm.
How they work
Microprocessor sends sound signals in digital form, which are converted into analogue using DAC.
Then these signals are passed the through an AMPLIFIER to speaker, whose diaphragm vibrates and
produces sound.

DAC Amplifier

Digital Analog
Data Data
The rate at which the DAC can translate the digital output into analogue voltages is known as the
Application: Speakers are used to output sound from multimedia presentations.
They are used in home entertainment centres.
They can help blind people (together with speech generation software) through audio output of
text on the screen.
They are used to play downloaded sound files.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 160

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
LCD Monitors
LCD (LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY/DIODE) monitors’ front layer is made up liquid crystal diodes;
these tiny diodes are grouped together in threes or fours which are known as pixels (picture
elements). The three colours which are grouped together use red, green and blue diodes. Those
systems that use groups of four include a yellow diode – this is said to make the colours more
vivid.
Because LCD doesn’t emit any light, some form of back-lit technology needs to be used. They use
a cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL) as the back lighting method. Essentially, CCFL uses two
fluorescent tubes behind the LCD screen which supplies the light source.
LED Monitors
Modern LCD monitors are back lit using LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) technology. This gives
the image better contrast and brightness. A matrix of tiny LEDs is used behind the LCD screen.
Advantages of LED over LCD
x LEDs reach their maximum brightness almost immediately (there is no need to ‘warm up’
before reaching full efficiency)
x LEDs give a whiter light which sharpens the image and make the colours appear more
vivid; CCFL had a slightly yellowish tint
x LEDs produce a brighter light which improves the colour definition
x monitors using LED technology are much thinner than monitors using CCFL technology
x LEDs last almost indefinitely; this makes the technology more reliable and means a more
consistent product
x LEDs consume very little power which means they produce less heat as well as using less
energy.
OLED Monitors
OLED ORGANIC LIGHT EMITTING DIODES use organic materials (made up of carbon
compounds) to create semi-conductors which are very flexible. Organic films are sandwiched
between two charged electrodes (one is a metallic CATHODE and the other a glass ANODE).
When an electric field is applied to the electrodes they give off light. This means that no form of
backlighting is required. This allows for very thin screens.
It also means that there is no longer a need to use LCD technology, since OLED is a self-
contained system.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 161

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Projectors:
Projectors are output devices used to project computer output onto larger screens or even onto
interactive whiteboards.
There are two common types of projectors:
1) Digital Light Projector
2) LCD Projector
Digital Light Projector (DLP):
How it works:
1. Millions of micro mirrors are used
2. Micro mirrors tilt towards light source are ON
3. Micro mirrors tilt away from light source are OFF
4. 1024 grey shades are produced for grey scale image
5. To produce a colour image light source is passed through colour filter. (primary colour are
RGB)
6. DLP projector can display 16 million colours
LCD Projector: This is an older technology
How it Works
1. A powerful beam of white light is
generated from a bulb or LED inside the
projector body.
2. This beam of light is then sent to a group
of chromatic-coated mirrors; these reflect
the light back at different wavelengths.
3. When the white light hits these mirrors,
the reflected light has wavelengths corresponding to red, green and blue light components.
4. These three different coloured light components pass through three LCD screens; these
screens show the image to be projected as millions of pixels in a grey scale.
5. When the coloured light passes through the LCD screens, a red, green and blue version of
the grey image emerges.
6. These images are then combined using a special prism to produce a full colour image – this
final image consists of millions of colours (each shade of grey in the original image
produces a different shade in each of the colour images).
7. Finally the image passes through the projector lens onto a screen.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 162

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Fill in missing statements
Questions are most commonly set from steps of bar code reading, sensors, operating ATM
machine etc.
Steps of bar code reading:
When barcode has been read, then what happens?
• The barcode number is looked up in the stock database (the barcode is known as the KEY FIELD
in the stock item record); this key field uniquely identifies each stock item.
• When the barcode number is found, the stock item record is looked up.
• The price and other stock item details are sent back to the checkout (or POINT OFSALE
TERMINAL (POS)).
• The number of stock items in the record is reduced by one each time the barcode is read.
• This new value for number of stock items is written back to the stock item record.
• The number of stock items is compared to the re-order level; if it is less than or equal to this value,
more stock items are automatically ordered.
• Once an order for more stock items is generated, a flag is added to the record to stop re-ordering
every time the stock item barcode is read.
• When new stock items arrive, the stock levels are updated in the database.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 163

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
39KPVGT
The following flowchart shows how the bar code written on an item is used to find the price, do stock
control and produce an itemised bill. Select statements from the list below to complete the flowchart.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 164

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
39KPVGT
The following flowchart shows how sensors (which can be analogue or digital) and a computer are
used to control the temperature of a greenhouse for plants. Complete the flowchart using the items
from the list below.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 165

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
39KPVGT2
A microprocessor controls the opening and closing of automatic doors to a supermarket. Customers
are detected using pressure sensors.
The flowchart on the next page shows how the sensors and microprocessor interact to control the
opening and closing of the doors. However, several of the stages in the process have been missed
out.
Using item number only, complete the flowchart using items from the following list:

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 166

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Topical Past Papers

F6XPPHU3
3 An optical mouse is a type of input device that can be used to input data into a computer system.
(a) Complete the paragraph about the operation of an optical mouse, using the most appropriate
terms from the given list. Not all terms need to be used.
• Ball • Battery • LCD • LED • Lens • Magnifies
• Matrix • Microswitch • Photoelectric • Photographic • Reduces • USB
An optical mouse shines an ............................................ from the bottom of the mouse onto a
surface. Light bounces straight back from the surface into a ............................................ cell. This
has a ............................................ that ............................................ the reflected light to allow
detection of smaller movements. When a button on the mouse is clicked,
a ............................................ is pressed. A ............................................ connection is used to
carry the data to the computer. [6]
(b) Identify two other input devices that can be used to enter data into a computer.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................ [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 167

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT2
8 (d) The LCD (liquid crystal display) on the clock face is back-lit using blue LEDs (light emitting
diodes). The brightness of the clock face is determined by the level of light in the room. The
amount of light given out by the LEDs is controlled by a control circuit.
Describe how the sensor, microprocessor and LEDs are used to maintain the correct brightness of
the clock face.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................[3]
(e) Modern LCD monitors and televisions use LED back-lit technology.
Give two advantages of using this new technology compared to the older cold cathode fluorescent
lamp (CCFL) method.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

3 5WOOGT2

2 The majority of mobile phones use touch screens. Three common technologies are used by different
mobile phone manufacturers. Choose one of the following mobile phone technologies:
• resistive • capacitive • infrared
Chosen technology ..........................................................................................................................
(i) Describe how your chosen technology works to allow a user to make selections by touching the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 168

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(ii) Give one benefit and one drawback of your chosen technology when used on mobile phone touch
screens.
Benefit ...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Drawback ..............................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
3 Four input devices, four descriptions and four applications are shown below.
Draw a line to connect each input device to its correct description. Then connect each description to its
correct application. [6]

ExaminerĜs comments on Question 3

Many candidates displayed an excellent level of knowledge input devices and their uses, gaining five or six
marks for the answer. The most common error was candidates confusing stock control and reading
passports.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 169

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 9KPVGT2
3 The flowchart on the opposite page shows what happens when the barcode on a product is
scanned at the checkout in a supermarket. The barcodes are used in an automatic stock control
system.
Several of the statements in the flowchart are missing.
Using item number only from the list below, complete the flowchart. [4]
Item Statement
number
1 Add flag to product record to indicate re-
order made
2 Any more barcodes to scan?
3 Has the scanned barcode been found in the
file?
4 Has the re-order flag already been added to
the product record?
5 Is number of product in stock <= re-order
level?
6 Number of product in stock is reduced by 1
7 Output an error message
8 Automatically send out order for new
product

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 170

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
8 The steps to print a document using a laser printer are shown in the table below.
Put each step in the correct order. The first step has been done for you. [8]
Step Order
As the printing drum rotates, a laser scans across it; this removes the positive charge
in certain areas
The printing drum is coated in positively-charged toner; this then sticks to the
negatively-charged parts of the printing drum
The paper goes through a fuser which melts the toner so it fixes permanently to the
paper
The printer driver ensures that the data is in a format that the laser printer can 1
understand
A negatively-charged sheet of paper is then rolled over the printing drum
Data is then sent to the laser printer and stored temporarily in the printer buffer
The toner on the printing drum is now transferred to the paper to reproduce the
required text and images
The printing drum is given a positive charge
Negatively-charged areas are then produced on the printing drum; these match
exactly with the text and images to be printed

3 9KPVGT2
1 (a) Name an application which makes use of the following sensors. A different application should
be used in each case.
Temperature .....................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
Magnetic field ..................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
Motion ..............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 171

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(b) The flowchart on the opposite page shows how a light sensor and microprocessor are used to
switch a street lamp on or off. When the sensor reading is <= 50 light units, the lamp is turned on
automatically.
Several of the instructions have been omitted from the flowchart.
Using item numbers only from the list below, complete the flowchart:[5]

Item Instruction
number
1 Count down in minutes
2 Is light reading <= 50?
3 Is street lamp already on?
4 Is time = 0?
5 The microprocessor compares the
sensor reading with stored values
6 The sensor reading is sent to the
microprocessor
7 Switch the street lamp off
8 Switch street lamp on
9 Time set to 10 minutes

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 172

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
7 Name a suitable output device for each of the following applications. A different device should be
used for each application.
Application Suitable output
device
Production of one-off photographs of very good quality
High volume colour printing of advertising flyers
Production of an object, which is built up layer by layer; used in
CAD applications
Converting electrical signals into sound
Showing enlarged computer output on a wall or large screen
8 Four input devices are shown in the table below.
Give an application which makes use of each device and state a reason why the device is
appropriate for that application. Your application must be different in each case.
Input device Application and reason
Light sensor Application .............................................................................................
Reason ..................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
Keyboard Application .............................................................................................
Reason ..................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
Barcode Application .............................................................................................
reader
Reason ..................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
Touch screen Application .............................................................................................
Reason ..................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................

3 9KPVGT2
5 (a) Inkjet printers and laser printers are two common types of printer.
Describe the features and principles of operation of each type of printer.
(i) Inkjet printer ..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 173

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

(ii) Laser printer: ...............................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Another type of printer is the 3D printer.
Describe 3D printing. .......................................................................................................................
…………………………........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [3]
1 (a) Four hardware items are shown in the table below.
For each hardware item:
• name a suitable application
• state how it is used in the application
Give a different application in each case. [8]
Hardware Application How the hardware item is used
item
Microphone .......................................................... ..........................................................
.......................................................... ..........................................................
.......................................................... ..........................................................
Barcode .......................................................... ..........................................................
reader .......................................................... ..........................................................
.......................................................... ..........................................................
Touch .......................................................... ..........................................................
screen .......................................................... ..........................................................
.......................................................... ..........................................................
Infrared .......................................................... ..........................................................
sensor .......................................................... ..........................................................
.......................................................... ..........................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 174

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
11 A passenger logs onto an airline website and types in the reference number for their flight.
Once the passenger accesses their account they can choose their seat and also print out a
boarding pass which contains a unique barcode. This barcode is scanned at the airport check-in
desk.
Name one input and one output device found at the check-in desk and give a reason for your
choice.
Input device: ........................................................................................................................
Reason: ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Output device: ....................................................................................................................
Reason: ...............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]

3 5WOOGT22
3 (a) Five sensors and five applications are shown below.
Draw a line to link each sensor to its most appropriate application. [4]

(a) Nikita wishes to print out some documents and connects her printer to the computer using one of the
USB ports.

Application
Sensor

Monitor the pollution levels in a river

Light sensor

Control the switching off and on of street lights

Moisture sensor

Detect intruders breaking into a building

Gas sensor

Monitor the amount of water left in clothes in a dryer

pH sensor

Pressure Monitor acidity levels in the soil in a green house

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 175

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
4 a(iii) The printer runs out of paper while it is printing the documents. A signal is sent to the
processor to request that the problem is dealt with.
Name this type of signal.: ................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State one suitable application for each printer below. A different application must be given for each
printer.
Inkjet printer ....................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
3D printer .......................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Name another type of printer and describe one way in which it is different from the printers named in
part (b).
Give an application for this printer.
Type of printer ..................................................................................................................
Description .......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
Application ..........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
12 (a) Name the following type of barcode:

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) An airport uses the type of barcode shown in part (a) to advertise local places of interest.
Describe how a visitor landing at the airport could use these barcodes to help plan their visit.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................[3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 176

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT2

9 A supermarket has a system that allows customers to check out their own shopping.
Identify and describe the purpose of two input devices and one output device used in this system.
Input device 1 .....................................................................................................................
Purpose .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................
Input device 2 ....................................................................................................................
Purpose ............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
Output device 1 ..................................................................................................................
Purpose ...........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [6]

3 9KPVGT2

4 The Henslows Diner is a local restaurant.

(a) Staff currently use a keyboard to input a customer food order into a computer. The food order
is then sent to the kitchen.
State two disadvantages of using a keyboard to input a customer food order.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................[2]
b) A concept keyboard has a flat surface that is overlaid with images of food items available
from the restaurant menu. Staff can click on an image to add the food item to a customer food
order.
The Henslows Diner wants to change to a concept keyboard to input customer food orders.
Explain two benefits of making this change.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 177

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [4]
7 Modern Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) monitors use Light-Emitting Diode (LED) backlit
technology. Give four benefits of using LED technology.
1 .......................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
3 .......................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
4 .......................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [4]
10 Describe the differences between a barcode and a Quick Response (QR) code.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................[3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 178

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
4 6XPPHU3

3 The diagram shows five output devices and five descriptions.

Draw a line between each output device and its description. [4]

Output
Description
Device

Flat panel display that uses the light modulating

Inkjet printer
properties of liquid crystals.

Flat panel display that uses an array of

LCD screen
light-emitting diodes as pixels.

2D cutter Droplets of ink are propelled onto paper.

Electrically charged powdered ink is transferred

LED screen
onto paper.

Laser printer High powered laser that uses the x-y plane.

Examiner Comment on Q 3
Most candidates correctly match the five terms to the correct descriptions.

6 Airline boarding passes can be read from a smart phone instead of a printout.

Identify what type of barcode A is an example of. Explain how the data stored in this type of
barcode is read.

........................................................................................................... ...........

............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................... [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 179

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
4 0DUFK3 ,QGLD 
12 A hospital stores the results of medical tests on a computer system. Each patient is given a
wristband containing a unique barcode. The barcode is used every time the patient has a medical
test.
(a) Explain two benefits of using barcodes in this situation.
Benefit 1 ...................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
Benefit 2 ...................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Describe how the barcode is read.
..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................[4]
Q 16) Summer 2018 P11
1 Jane answers an examination question about computers and data correctly.
Six different words or numbers have been removed from her answer.
Complete the sentences in Jane’s answer, using the list given. Not all items in the list need to be
used.
•2 • 10 • 16 • analogue
• binary • denary • digital • hexadecimal
As humans, we process …………………………………… data, but a computer cannot process this
type of data. For a computer to be able to process data it needs to be converted to
…………………………………… data.
As humans, we mostly use a …………………………………… number system; this is a base
…………………………………… number system.
Computers use a …………………………………… number system; this is a base
…………………………………… number system. [6]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 180

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
8 A supermarket uses a barcode scanner to read the barcodes on its products.
(a) Describe how the barcode scanner reads the barcode.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Explain how the barcode system could help the supermarket manage its stock.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) An infrared touch screen is used to view and navigate the supermarket stock system.
Explain how the infrared touch screen detects a user’s touch.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................. [4]

Q 17) Summer 2018 P12

2 (a) Nancy has captured images of her holiday with her camera. The captured images are stored
as digital photo files on her camera.
Explain how the captured images are converted to digital photo files.
............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 181

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
9 An advertisement in a magazine displays this barcode:

(a) Identify this type of barcode.

.......................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain how the data stored in this barcode is read.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
10 Alexandra has a new mobile device.
It has a touch screen that uses capacitive technology.
(a) Describe how a capacitive touch screen registers Alexandra’s touch.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Alexandra is wearing gloves because it is cold.
She presses an icon on her touch screen but her action is not registered.
(i) Explain why the touch screen will not register her touch.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Alexandra does not want to remove her gloves.
Explain how Alexandra could use her mobile device whilst still wearing gloves.
.......................................................................................................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 182

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
Q 18) Winter 2018 P12
5 (a) Karina is taking her Computer Science examination. She has three questions to answer
about output devices.
(i) For the first question she writes the answer:
“It is a high powered laser that cuts materials such as thin metals or wood.”
Identify the output device that Karina is describing.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) For the second question she writes the answer:
“The screen is made up of blocks of red, green and blue pixels. The screen uses layers of different
types of liquid.” Identify the output device that Karina is describing.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) For the third question she writes the answer:
“It is responsible for powering and moving a motor in machinery, such as a robot arm in a factory.”
Identify the output device that Karina is describing.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Karina correctly answers another examination question about some more output devices.
Five different terms have been removed from her answer.
Complete the sentences in Karina’s answer, using the list given. Not all terms in the list need to be
used.
• 3D • digital light projector • inkjet • interactive whiteboard • laser
• rotating • thermal bubble • scanning • sliding • speaker
An ................................................................................................... allows a user to write on a
surface using a pen, the text and drawings can then be captured and stored for later use.
An ................................................................................................... printer produces a hard copy of
a document using ................................................................................................... and piezoelectric
technology. A ................................................................................................... printer uses
a .............................................................................................. drum, and positive and negative
charges, to produce a hard copy of a document. [5]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 183

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Q 19) Winter 2018 P13
1 There are six output devices and six descriptions shown. Draw a line to connect each output
device to the most appropriate description. [5]
Description Device
Uses a high-intensity beam of light shone
Laser Printer
through three layers of changing pixels

Uses millions of micro mirrors to reflect light

LCD Projector
through a lens

Digital Light Uses plastic, resin or powdered metal to

Projector (DLP) generate a physical output

Uses a static electric charge on a rotating

Inkjet Printer
drum to generate a physical output

3D Printer Uses liquid ink to generate a physical output

Uses a high-power laser to generate a

2D Cutter
physical output

Q 20) March 2019 P12

2 Many computer systems have an input device and an output device.
(a) (i) State what is meant by an input device.
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give an example of an input device.
....................................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) State what is meant by an output device.
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give an example of an output device.
....................................................................................................................................................... [1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 184

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Q 21) Summer 2019 P11
3 Five descriptions of different input or output devices are given in the table.
Complete the table by stating the name of each input or output device. [5]
Description Name of device
This is an input device that works by shining a light onto the
surface of a document. The light source is automatically
...................................................
moved across the document and the reflected light is captured
by mirrors and lenses.
This is an input device where a laser or a light source is
moved across an object. The width, height and depth of the ...................................................
object are measured to allow a model to be created.
This is a large input device that is usually fixed to a wall. A
user can calibrate the device to make sure the sensors align
...................................................
with a projected image. The user can use either their finger or
a special pen to make selections.
This is an output device that uses many small mirrors to
...................................................
reflect light towards a lens. This will display an image.
This is an output device that creates an object by building
...................................................
layer upon layer of material.
Q 22) Summer 2019 P12
1 Input and output devices are often connected to a personal computer.
(a) Identify three input devices that can be connected to a personal computer.
1 ........................................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Identify three output devices that can be connected to a personal computer.
1 .......................................................................................................................................................
2 ......................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................. [3]
4 (ii) Marley prints the images for his project using an inkjet printer.
Describe how the inkjet printer prints an image.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 185

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
10 Remy has a mobile device that has a capacitive touch screen.
Describe how the capacitive touch screen registers Remy’s touch.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [4]
Q 23) Winter 2019 P13
1 A library has a system that allows customers to check out the books that they want to borrow.
Each book has a barcode that can be used to identify the book.
(a) (i) Identify two input devices that may be used in the library’s system.
Input device 1 ....................................................................................................................
Input device 2 ....................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Identify two storage devices that may be used in the library’s system.
Storage device 1 ...............................................................................................................
Storage device 2 ...............................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Identify two output devices that may be used in the library’s system.
Output device 1 .................................................................................................................
Output device 2 .................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The library often holds events that introduce new authors.
At the events, the library has a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen that displays data, including an
image and information about the author.
Describe how an LCD screen operates to display this data.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [5]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 186

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Q 24) Winter 2019 P12
6 Touch screen technologies can be described as resistive or capacitive.
Six statements are given about resistive and capacitive technology.

Tick (㾐) to show if the statement applies to Resistive or Capacitive technology. [6]

Resistive Capacitive
Statement
(㾐) (㾐)
This touch screen has multi-touch capabilities
This touch screen cannot be used whilst wearing gloves
This touch screen is made up of two layers with a small space in
between
This touch screen uses the electrical properties of the human
body
This touch screen is normally cheaper to manufacture
This touch screen has a quicker response time
Q 26) Summer 20 P12
6 Six statements are given about touch screen technology.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if the statement applies to Capacitive or Resistive touch screen technology. [6]
Capacitiv
Resistive
Statement e
(‫)ض‬
(‫)ض‬
Needs pressure to be applied to create a circuit
May not register a touch if the user is wearing gloves
More commonly used in smartphones
More responsive to a touch
Needs an electrical field to be changed to register a touch
Cheaper to manufacture

8 Leonard has a new laser printer to print letters for his business.
Leonard connects his printer to his computer using the USB port.
(a) Give three benefits of using the USB port to connect the printer to the computer.
Benefit 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Benefit 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 187

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Benefit 3 ...................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State two benefits and one drawback of Leonard using a laser printer, instead of an inkjet
printer, to print the letters.
Benefit 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Benefit 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Drawback ..................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) An interrupt signal is sent from the printer to the computer.
(i) Give two examples of when a printer would generate an interrupt signal.
Example 1 .........................................................................................................................
Example 2 ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Many devices send interrupt signals.
Identify the software in the computer that will receive and manage all interrupt signals.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Q 27) 15a Summer 20 P11
1 An image of a smartphone is shown.

(a) Identify one input device that is part of the smartphone.

........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Identify two output devices that are part of the smartphone.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................ [2]

6 Four scenarios are given.

Identify the most suitable sensor for each scenario.
A different sensor must be used for each scenario. [4]
Sensor Scenario
Detecting when a person is approaching an automatic door system
Monitoring the pollution level in a river

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 188

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Checking if a tropical aquarium is 25 degrees Celsius
Counting the number of cars that cross a bridge

8 Benny is a photographer and prints his photos using an inkjet printer.

(a) Benny is printing some photos and the paper gets jammed in the printer.
A signal is sent to alert the computer about the paper jam.
State the name of this type of signal.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Identify one benefit and two drawbacks of Benny using an inkjet printer, instead of a laser
printer, to print his photos.
Benefit ......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Drawback 1 ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Drawback 2 ...............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Four statements are given about printers.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show whether the statement applies to an Inkjet printer or a Laser printer. [4]
Laser
Statement Inkjet (‫)ض‬
(‫)ض‬
Uses a rotating drum to transfer the image to the
paper
Uses powdered toner
Uses nozzles to spray droplets on to the paper
Uses a print head mechanism that moves side to
side

Q 28) Winter 20 P12

1 (c) Tina uses a microphone to record a welcome message for her website.
(i) State whether the microphone is an input or output device.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
5 Tammy is buying a new computer that has an LED display.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 189

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
(a) Five statements about LED displays are given.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if each statement is True or False. [5]
True False
Statement
(‫)ض‬ (‫)ض‬
It is a flat panel display
It creates images using red, green and blue diodes
It is not very energy efficient and gives off heat
It can be used in mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets
It is a front-lit display
Q 29) Winter 20 P13
1 Five hardware devices are given.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if each device is an Input, Output or Storage device. [5]

Device Input (‫)ض‬ Output (‫)ض‬ Storage (‫)ض‬

Solid state drive (SSD)
Headphones
2D cutter
LCD projector
Microphone
8 Edith is buying a new computer monitor that displays images using LCD technology.
(a) Explain what is meant by LCD technology.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) State three benefits of LCD technology.
Benefit 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Benefit 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 190

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
Benefit 3 ...................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
Q 30) March 21 P12
3 The given table shows the name or description of four devices. The table is incomplete.
Complete the missing device names and descriptions. [4]

Device name Description

Uses either thermal bubble or piezoelectric technology

....................................

.......................................................................................
Actuator .......................................................................................
.......................................................................................
........................................................................................
Uses thousands of tiny mirrors that can move very
.......................................
quickly to create an image

........................................................................................
Mouse ........................................................................................
........................................................................................
.........................................................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 191

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 192

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 193

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 9KPVGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 194

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

3 9KPVGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 195

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 196

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 197

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 9KPVGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 198

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

3 5WOOGT22

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 199

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 200

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H
3 5WOOGT2

3 9KPVGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 201

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_

Q 12) Summer 2017 P12

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 202

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_

Q 15) March 2018 P12 (India)

Q 16) Summer 2018 P11

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 203

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_

Q 17) Summer 2018 P12

Q 18) Winter 2018 P12

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 204

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_
Q 19) Winter 2018 P13

Q 20) March 2019 P12

Q 21) Summer 2019 P11




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 205

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_
Q 22) Summer 2019 P12

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 206

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_
Q 23) Winter 2019 P13

Q 24) Winter 2019 P12




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 207

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_
Q 26) Summer 20 P12




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 208

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_
Q 27) 15a Summer 20 P11

Q 28) Winter 20 P12




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 209

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_
Q 29) Winter 20 P13

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 210

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_
Q 30) March 21 P12




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 211

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

3DJH_
4 A supermarket sells many products. Each product has a barcode.
(a) Explain how the barcode is read at the supermarket checkout and how the price of the product
is found.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]

Summer 21 P12
8 A keyboard is a type of input device that can be used to enter data into a computer.
Complete the paragraph that describes one method of operation for a keyboard, using the most
appropriate terms from the given list. Not all terms in the list need to be used.
• Binary • Breaks • Calculated • Character • Circuit • Current
• Information • Network • Press • Processor • Signal • Switch
A keyboard has a key matrix underneath the keys. When a key is pressed, it presses
a ............................................. that completes a ............................................. . This
allows ............................................. to flow. The location of the key pressed
is ............................................. . The location of the key pressed is compared to
a ............................................. map to find the ............................................. value for the key that
has been pressed. [6]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 212

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

Chapter 6

1.3.5 Storage Devices


Storage Media & Devices
The device that actually holds the data is known as the
storage medium (‘media’ is the plural).
The device that saves data onto the storage medium,
or reads data from it, is known as the storage device.
Storage Device: The machine which stores data on
storage medium.

Storage Media: The physical material in which a devices stores data.

A computer holds programs and data in three sorts of device:
1. Primary — main memory, stores data and instructions to be directly
accessed by processor. It has a limited-capacity but rapid-access
during processing
2. Secondary — main storage, stores all data and programs. It has
larger-capacity but slower-access. They remain inside computer.
3. Off-line — back-up storage, portable, they are removed after
read/write data. stores data/programs for future use.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 213

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

All data and programs are stored in secondary storage. They are loaded n primary storage so as
processor can read it. The results of processing is firstly stored by processor in memory and then
saved in secondary storage.

Primary memory
Data stored in primary memory can be accessed quickly and directly by the computer’s processor.
Primary storage is a computer’s internal storage. It is in this storage where data is held ready for
processing.
Primary memory is also known as ‘primary storage’ or ‘memory’.
Its capacity of primary memory is quite small.
Primary storage is separated into Random Access Memory (RAM) and Read Only Memory (ROM).
Primary memory consists of:
• Non-volatile, read-only memory (ROM) to hold a small program to start up computer, BIOS,
firmware, permanent
• volatile, read-write, random access memory (RAM) to hold the programs and data currently
being processed, user memory, temporary
Differences between RAM and ROM
RAM ROM
Applications x Part of Operating system x A program used to start the
What they contain? x Currently in use data computer called the ‘Start-up
programs. routine’ or BIOS.
x Factory setting such as remote
control frequencies
x stores the set of routines; for
example, how the buttons
embedded system work
Can the contents be Yes. No.
changed? (Is it The contents of the RAM are The contents of ROM cannot normally
volatile?) changed all the time while the be changed.
computer is running.
It is temporary. It is permanent.
Who can store data User Manufacturer
Volatile or Non- It is volatile, i.e. it needs It is non-volatile i.e. it can retain data
volatile continuous power supply to even when there is no power supply.
retain data.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 214

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

ROM
ROM stands for Read Only Memory. The memory from which we can only read but cannot write
on it. This type of memory is non-volatile. The information is stored permanently in such
memories during manufacture. A ROM stores such instructions that are required to start a
computer. This operation is referred to as bootstrap. ROM chips are not only used in the
computer but also in embedded systems like washing machine and microwave oven.
Types of ROM
Here are the various types of ROMs and their characteristics.
ROM: Read Only Memory
PROM: Programmable ROM
EPROM: Erasable Programmable ROM
EEPROM: Electrically Erasable PROM
ROM (or Masked ROM)
The very first ROMs were hard-wired devices that contained a pre-programmed set of data or
instructions.
PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory) It can be programmed only once and is not erasable.
EPROM (Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory)
It can be programmed and erased several times by exposing it to ultra-violet light.
EEPROM (Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory)
EEPROM is programmed and erased electrically several time.
Advantages of ROM
The advantages of ROM are as follows :
x Non-volatile in nature
x Cannot be accidentally changed
x Cheaper than RAMs
x Easy to test
x More reliable than RAMs
x Static and do not require refreshing

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 215

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


RAM
RAM Stands for Random Access Memory. It is the essential part of every computer.
It is Random because its contents can be accessed randomly.
It is Access memory because user can load contents in it, can modify its contents and can erase.
It is volatile, it loses all its contents when computer is switched off.
There are two different types of RAM, Static & Dynamic
SRAM DRAM
SRAM consists of a number of complex DRAM consists of
circuits (NAND or NOR). Each circuit stores x capacitors to hold bit of data (0 or 1)
one bit of data (0 or 1). x and transistors to change capacitors’
value like a switch.
NAND and NOR gates never leaks charge Capacitors leaks charge with passage of
so SRAM does not need to be refreshed time so DRAM requires data to be refreshed
again and again. periodically in order to retain the data.
requires less power consumption requires higher power consumption which is
significant when used in battery-powered
devices
used predominantly in cache memory of Commonly used in RAM
processors where speed is important
Has lesser storage capacity has higher storage capacity
More expensive less expensive

Secondary Storage
The main storage of computer where all data and programs are saved in the secondary storage.
Secondary storage devices are non-volatile. They can retain data even when computer is switched
off. Their storage capacity is much larger than primary memory RAM while access speed is slower.
Secondary storage includes:
• Hard disks drive (HDD)
• Solid-state drive (SSD)
Internal Operation of Hard Disk Drive

S No Step
The hard disk has one or more platters made of aluminium or glass
Each surface of the platter/disk is ferrous-oxide which is capable of being magnetised
The disks are rotated at high-speed
Each surface of the disk has a read/write head mounted on an arm positioned just
above the surface
Electronic circuits control the movement of the arm and hence the heads
The surface of the platter/disk is divided into concentric tracks and sectors
One track in one sector is the basic unit of storage called a block
The data is encoded as a magnetic pattern for each block

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 216

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


When writing to disk, a variation in the current in the head produces a variation in
magnetic field on the disk
When reading from disk, a variation in magnetic field produces a variation in current
through the head
Uses
x Fixed hard drives are used to store the operating system and working data.
x They are used for storing applications software that needs fast retrieval and storage of data.
x Real-time systems (e.g. robots, control of a chemical plant) and online systems (e.g. booking
airline tickets, automatic stock control (using EPOS)) used fixed hard drives.
x They are used in file servers for computer networks.

Solid State Drive (SSD)

Solid State Devices uses NAND or NOR chips, by movements of electrons.
These are non-volatile memory.
The term ‘solid-state’ essentially means ‘no moving parts’.
Solid-state storage devices are based on electronic circuits with no moving parts (no reels of
tape, no spinning discs, no laser beams, etc.), so the issue of LATENCY is removed. All data is
retrieved at the same rate.
Many of our digital devices (cameras, mobile phones, MP3 players, etc.) require compact, non-
volatile data storage. Flash memory cards provide this and come in a variety of shapes and sizes.

How SSD works

SSD uses NAND or NOR flash memory. It stores data in individual memory cells, using memory
transistor. Each transistor composed of:
x a Control Gate, the top layer of transistor.
x A floating gate, the lower segment
The control gate attracts electrons and trapped some of them within floating gate, if electrons are
trapped in floating gate, this state is known as bit value 1, and it remain same even there is no power
supply. To reset a high voltage is applied which removes the electrons from floating gate.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 217

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Attribute NAND Slid state NOR Solid State
Storage capacity High Low
Cost per bit Less expensive More expensive
Allows blocks of data (512 bytes Allows data to be read or erased in single
Access
or more) to be read or erased. bytes at a time.
Write speed Good
Read speed Good
Code execution e.g. EEPROM
File storage e.g. SSD & Flash m
technology.
emory
EEPROM technology is used for some
security gadgets, such as credit card, SIM
card, key-less entry, etc.
Main application

Advantages of SSD over HDD

x they are more reliable (no moving parts to go wrong)
x they are considerably lighter (which makes them suitable for laptops)
x they don’t have to ‘get up to speed’ before they work properly
x they have a lower power consumption
x they run much cooler than HDDs (these last two points again make them very suitable for
laptop computers)
x because they have no moving parts, they are very thin
x data access is considerably faster than HDD.

SSD Endurance
Most solid state storage devices are conservatively rated at only 20 GB write operations per day
over a three-year period – this is known as SSD endurance. For this reason,
SSD technology is not used in servers, for example, where a huge number of write operations take
place every day. However, this issue is being addressed by a number of manufacturers to improve
the durability of these solid-state systems.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 218

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Off-line Storage
Offline storage refers to any storage medium that must be physically inserted into a system every
time a user wants to access or edit data. Offline storage can be any type of internal or external
storage that can easily be removed from the computer.
Offline storage is also known as removable storage and includes:
• Optical devices like CDs, DVDs
• Solid state USB memory sticks
• External Hard disk
Optical Storage Devices / Media
Optical storage devices save data as patterns of dots that can be read using light. A laser beam
is the usual light source. The data on the storage medium is read by bouncing the laser beam off
the surface of the medium. If the beam hits a PIT it is reflected back differently to how it would be
if there was LAND. This difference can be detected, so the data can be read.
PITS can be created using the laser beam (for media that is writable such as CD-Rs). The beam
is used in a high-power mode to actually mark the surface of the medium, making a PIT. This
process is known as ‘burning’ data onto a disc.

Internal Working of Optical Disk

– (Red) laser is used
– (Laser beams) shines onto surface of the disk
– It is rotated (at a constant speed) to be read
– Surface is covered in a track (that spirals from the centre)
– Data is represented on the surface using pits and lands
– Pits and lands represent binary values
– Pits reflect light back differently (to the area in between/land)
– Optical device can determine the binary value from the light reflection


+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 219

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


The main types of CD and DVD have different suffixes, as follows:
– ROM stands for ‘Read-Only Memory’ – suitable for distribution of movies and software etc.
– R stands for ‘Recordable’ – these can be written to just once and then can only be read from,
making them suitable for archive copies of documents
– RW stands for ‘ReWritable’ – these can be written to and read multiple times, making them
suitable for making temporary copies of data files for regular backup copies
DVD-RAM is a DVD (optical disc) technology for high-capacity data storage for computers. Like
ordinary random access memory (RAM), it can be repeatedly read, written to, and erased.
– Blu-ray discs (BD or BR) have larger storage capacities than other optical storage media and a
higher rate of data transfer. Although disks are expensive, their cost per gigabyte of storage is nearer
to that of a HDD. Differences between CDs, DVDs, DVD-RAM and Blu-Ray
CD DVD DVD-RAM Blu-Ray
Track Single Spiral Multiple
Single Spiral Track Single Spiral Track
Track Concentric Tracks

Layer Single Double Double Single

polycarbonate polycarbonate polycarbonate polycarbonate
layer layer layer layer
Two sandwiched Two sandwiched
lays causes lays causes
No birefringence Birefringence(light Birefringence(ligh No birefringence
as no sandwiched is refracted into two t is refracted into as no sandwiched
layers separate beams two separate layers
causing reading beams causing
errors) reading errors)
Laser Uses red laser with Uses red laser Uses Blue laser
Uses red laser
wavelength of 650 with wavelength of with wavelength of
with wavelength
nanometres 650 nanometres. 405 nanometres.
of 780
Increases storage Increases storage Increases storage
nanometres
capacity capacity capacity
Read/
Numerous, up to
Write
100,000 times
Cycle
Head Single Head so Single Head so Double Head so Single Head so
Read or Write at Read or Write at a Read and Write Read or Write at a
a time time simultaneously time

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 220

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Calculating the Storage Requirement of a File
Memory Size Measurement
It should be pointed out here that there is some confusion in the naming of memory sizes.
The unit was established by the International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) in 1998, has
been accepted for use by all major standards organizations, and is part of the International System
of Quantities. The kibibyte was designed to replace the kilobyte in those computer science contexts
in which the term kilobyte is used to mean 1024 bytes. The interpretation of the kilobyte to denote
1024 bytes, conflicting with the SI definition of the prefix kilo (1000), is still common, mostly in
informal computer science contexts.
The IEC convention is now adopted by some organisations. Manufacturers of storage devices often
use the denary system to measure storage size. For example:
0 or 1 = 1 bit
4 bits = 1 nibble
8 bits = 2 niblles = 1 byte
SI Units IEC Units
1 kilo byte = 1000 byte 1 kibi byte (1 KiB) = 1,024 bytes
1 mega byte = 1000,000 bytes 1 mebi byte (1 MiB) = 1,048,576 bytes
(1000 * 1000) (1,024 * 1,024)
1 giga byte = 1,000,000,000 bytes 1 gibi byte (1 GiB) = 1,073,741,824 bytes
(1,000,000 * 1000) (1,048,576 * 1,024)
1 tera byte = 1,000,000,000,000 bytes and so 1 tebi byte (1 TiB) = 1,099,511,627,776 bytes and
on. so on
(1,000,000,000 *1000) (1,073,741,824 * 1,024)

Example Question 1: A company advertises its backup memory device as having 500 GB of
storage. A customer wishes to know how many 8 MB files could be stored on the device. The
company claimed that up to 62 500 files (assuming each file is 8 MB) could be stored. The
customer calculated that 64 000 files could be stored.
Explain the difference between these two storage values. Show any calculations you use in your
explanation. ........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.....
Marking Scheme
–company calculation is based on 1 GByte = 1000 Mbyte – so (500 × 1000)/8 = 62 500 files
– customer calculation based on 1 GByte = 1024 Mbyte – so (500 × 1024)/8 = 64000 files
– giving the difference of 1500 files [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 221

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Example Question 2: Bytes, Kilobytes and Megabytes are units used for the amount of data
stored in a computer.
(a) State which of these units is most appropriate for the following items of data.
A one page text document: ...............................................................................................................
A ten minute movie clip: ....................................................................................................................
A person’s surname: .................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A computer has a hard disk of 2 Terabytes.
How much is this in Gigabytes?
You must show your working.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [2]
Marking Scheme
a) x A 1-page text document: Kilobyte(s)
x A 10-min movie clip: Megabyte(s)
x A person’s surname: Byte(s)
(b) x Multiply by 1024/1000
x 2048/2000 (GB)

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 222

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


6QRKECN2CUV2CRGTU
3 5WOOGT2
5 Five storage devices are described in the table below.
In column 2, name the storage device being described.
In columns 3, 4, or 5, tick (9) to show the appropriate category of storage.
1 2 3 4 5
Description of storage device Name of Category of storage
storage device Primary Secondary Off-line
optical media which use one spiral track;
red lasers are used to read and write
data on the media surface; makes use of
dual-layering technology to increase the
storage capacity
non-volatile memory chip; contents of the
chip cannot be altered; it is often used to
store the start up routines in a computer
(e.g. the BIOS)
optical media which use concentric
tracks to store the data; this allows read
and write operations to be carried out at
the same time
non-volatile memory device which uses
NAND flash memories (which consist of
millions of transistors wired in series on
single circuit boards)
optical media which use blue laser
technology to read and write data on the
media surface; it uses a single 1.1 mm
polycarbonate disc
3 9KPVGT2
5 A security system uses sensors, a camera and a microprocessor to capture images of each
person entering a large shopping mall.
(b) Each image taken requires 1 MB of storage. If the camera captures an image every 5 seconds
over a 24 hour period, how much storage is required?
Give your answer in gigabytes and show all your working.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................[2]
(c) The shopping mall has over 100 cameras. At the end of each day all these cameras send their
images, captured over the last 24 hours, to a central computer.
Explain why the mall uses dedicated fibre optic cable rather than transmitting the data over the
local broadband network.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................[2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 223

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


9 A remote-controlled model car contains RAM, ROM and a solid state drive. The car receives
radio signals from its remote control. It can only receive radio signals of a certain frequency. The
manufacturer sets this frequency and the owner cannot change it. The owner of the model car can
input their own sequence of movements from an interface underneath the car.
(a) Describe the purpose of each of the three types of memory supplied with the car.
RAM: .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
ROM: .................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
Solid state drive: ..................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The owner needs to be able to enter their own sequence of movements for the model car.
Name a suitable input device.
Input device: ................................................................................................................................
Give a reason for your choice of device.
............................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain why the model car uses a solid state drive rather than another type of secondary
storage.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................[2]
3 9KPVGT2
5 A security system records video footage. One minute of video requires 180 MB of storage. The
recording system can store several hours of video footage.
(a) Name and describe a suitable storage device for this recording system.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate how much storage would be needed for 2 hours of video footage.
Show your working and give the answer in Gigabytes (GB).
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................... [2]
3 9KPVGT2
1 (b) Describe two differences between Blu-ray discs and DVDs.
1: ......................................................................................................................................
2: .......................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Describe two differences between DVD-R and DVD-RAM.
1: .........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
2: ........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................[2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 224

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


7 (c) A company advertises its backup memory device as having 500 GB of storage.
A customer wishes to know how many 8 MB files could be stored on the device.
The company claimed that up to 62 500 files (assuming each file is 8 MB) could be stored.
The customer calculated that 64 000 files could be stored.
Explain the difference between these two storage values. Show any calculations you use in your
explanation.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [3]
9 (b) Nicolae needs to send 30 photos to a friend and he chooses to send all 30 together as a
single email attachment. Each photo is 1.8 MB in size, but the maximum possible attachment size
is only 20 MB. State how Nicolae can solve this problem.
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................... [1]
3 5WOOGT22
11 (a) The table below shows four features of optical storage media.
Tick (㾐) the appropriate boxes in the table to indicate which of the features apply to each example
of optical storage media. [4]
Many concentric Blue laser used to Red laser used to
Single track
tracks read/write data read/ write data
DVD-RW
DVD-RAM
CD-ROM
Blu-ray disc
(b) Solid state drives (SSD) are replacing hard disc drives (HDD) in some computers.
(i) Give three reasons why this is happening.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
3 .......................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 225

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(ii) Explain why many web servers still use hard disc drive (HDD) technology.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[2]
10 There are six descriptions in the table below.
Complete the table below by writing the correct storage device or media in the box next to each
description. [6]
Storage device
Description
or media
Non-volatile memory that can only be read from and not written to.
Optical storage media that allows very high storage capacity by using
blue/violet laser technology.
Volatile memory that stores data, programs and the parts of the operating
system that are currently in use.
Optical storage media that uses a single spiral track and uses dual layer
technology, allowing high data storage capacity.
Device that stores data by controlling the movement of electrons within a
microchip; there are no moving parts.
Optical storage media that uses concentric tracks allowing writing and
reading to take place at the same time.
Examiner Report Question 10
Many candidates were able to provide suitable storage device. Common errors were the confusion of CD and DVD, and also not
being specific enough for sold state, stating USB, but not relating it to being a USB storage device. USB alone can refer to many
things.
3 9KPVGT2
8 Identify whether the four statements about file compression are correct by writing TRUE or
FALSE in the following table. [4]
Statement TRUE or FALSE
MIDI files store the actual music notes in a compressed format
JPEG files are examples of lossless file compression
MP3 files are, on average, 90% smaller than the music files stored on a CD
MP4 files are examples of lossy file compression
3 9KPVGT2
10 (b) The current status of the engine is sent to a computer in the aeroplane.
Each piece of data collected is 8 bytes in size. Data collection occurs every 30 seconds.
Calculate the number of kilobytes that would be needed to store the data collected during a
10-hour flight. Show your
working...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

................................................. kilobytes [3]

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 226

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 /CTEJ+PFKC
13 (a) Explain what is meant by primary, secondary and off-line storage. Give an example of each.
Primary storage ................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
Example ..........................................................................................................................
Secondary storage .........................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
Example ..........................................................................................................................
Off-line storage ................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
Example ........................................................................................................................ [6]
(b) A set of photographs has been taken for a wedding. All the guests are to be sent digitally
stored copies through the ordinary postal service. There are fifty photographs and each
photograph is between 1.8 and 2.5 megabytes in size.
Work out the maximum storage space required for a set of photographs. State, with a reason, a
suitable medium to use for the copies to be sent to the guests.
Maximum storage space ....................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Medium ............................................................................................................................
Reason ...............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
3 5WOOGT2
3 Steffi has a number of files of different sizes that contain her work. [4]
Tick to show whether each statement is true or false.
Statement True False
47KB is larger than 10MB.
250bytes is smaller than 0.5MB.
50GB is larger than 100MB.
1TB is smaller than 4GB.
8 Complete the paragraph by choosing six correct terms from the list.
• Optical • On-line • RAM • HDD • Primary
• SSD • Secondary • ROM • Off-line
A computer has two different types of memory. .................................... memory is not directly
accessed by the CPU, but it allows a user to store data that can easily be accessed by
applications. Two examples of this type of memory are ....................................
and .................................... . The second type of memory is .................................... memory. This
memory is directly accessed by the CPU. It allows the processor to access data and instructions
that are stored in this memory. Two examples of this memory are ....................................
and .................................... . [6]

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 227

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2

2 Give two examples of primary, secondary and off-line storage.

Primary
Example 1 ........................................................................................................................
Example 2 .......................................................................................................................
Secondary
Example 1 .......................................................................................................................
Example 2 .......................................................................................................................
Off-line
Example 1 ......................................................................................................................
Example 2 .................................................................................................................... [6]

3 9KPVGT2
2 Storage devices and storage media can be categorised as primary, secondary or off-line.
Write primary, secondary or off-line next to each storage device or medium to indicate its most
suitable category.
HDD .........................................................................................................................
RAM .........................................................................................................................
ROM .........................................................................................................................
CD-ROM .........................................................................................................................
SSD .........................................................................................................................
DVD-RAM ...................................................................................................................... [6]
8 (a) A computer has 2048MB of RAM. How many GB of RAM does the computer have?
Show your working.
...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................GB [2]
(b) Describe one item that is stored in RAM.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Explain three ways that RAM is different to ROM.
1 ...........................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 228

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 ..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ [3]

3 9KPVGT2
2 Data files are stored in different file formats.
Complete the table by providing a suitable file format for each file type. The first one has been
done for you. [3]
File type File format
Pictures .JPEG
Text
Sound
Video
9 (a) Optical storage media can be used to store data.
Describe how the data is read from a Compact Disc (CD).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Kamil wants to store a 16-bit colour image file. The image size is 1000 pixels.
Calculate the size of the file. Give your answer in bytes. Show your working.
Working ...........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
Answer ............................... bytes [2]
(c) Describe the differences between primary and secondary storage.
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [4]

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 229

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 /CTEJ2 +PFKC 
6 Primary, secondary and off-line are types of storage.
Give an example of each type of storage. For each example state how it is used.
Primary storage Example ......................................................................................................
Use ........................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
Secondary storage Example ................................................................................................
Use ........................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
Off-line storage Example .....................................................................................................
Use ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................... [6]
9 A 32-second sound clip will be recorded. The sound will be sampled 16000 times a second.
Each sample will be stored using 8 bits.
Calculate the file size in kilobytes. You must show all of your working.

File Size ..................................................................................................... kB [3]

3 5WOOGT2
8 (d) The supermarket uses secondary storage and off-line storage to store data about its stock.
Explain what is meant by secondary storage and off-line storage.
Secondary storage .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
Off-line storage ...................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 230

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 17) Summer 2018 P12
1 Different units of data can be used to represent the size of a file, as it changes in size.
Fill in the missing units of data, using the list given: [4]
Byte gigabyte (GB) megabyte (MB) nibble
Smallest Bit
……………………………………
……………………………………
Kilobyte (KB)
………………………………….
………………………………….
Largest Terabyte (TB)

3 9KPVGT2
2 A computer uses RAM and ROM to store data.
(a) The table contains three statements about RAM or ROM.
Tick (‫ )ݱ‬to show whether each statement describes RAM or ROM. [3]

Statement RAM(‫)ݱ‬ ROM(‫)ݱ‬

Stores the programs and data that are currently in use
Used to boot up the computer when power is turned on
Contents are retained when power is turned off
(b) Circle the storage category that includes both RAM and ROM.
Primary Secondary Off-line [1]
(c) Explain what is meant by off-line storage.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................[2]

3 9KPVGT2
9 Describe two differences between Read Only Memory (ROM) and Random Access Memory
(RAM).
Difference 1 ......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 231

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Difference 2 .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................ [4]
13 State which types of storage device or media would be most suitable for these scenarios.
For each device or media, justify your choice.
(a) Creating a backup of 150GB of data. Device: ...........................................................................
Justification .........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Storing applications on a tablet Device. .....................................................................................
Justification .........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Storing a 1200MB high-definition promotional movie about a new car. The movie is to be given
to people who are interested in buying a new car. .............................................................................
Justification .........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [2]

3 /CTEJ2
1 (a) Elle has a file stored on her computer that is 20 MB in size. Jordan has a file that is 10GB in
size. Tick (99) to show which is the larger file. [1]
File size Tick (9)
20MB
10GB
(b) Bob has a file stored on his computer that is 3500kB in size. Gerty has a file that is 3MB in
size. Tick (9) to show which is the larger file. [1]
File size Tick (9)
3500kB
3MB
6 (c) Nadia uses several types of computer storage for her homework and other projects.
(i) Five examples of computer storage are given.
Tick (3) to show if the computer storage is Primary, Secondary or Off-line. [5]

Storage example Primary (9) Secondary (9) Off-line (9)

Solid state drive (SSD)
Blu-ray disc
USB flash memory
Random access memory (RAM)
Read only memory (ROM)

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 232

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(ii) Nadia is considering purchasing a magnetic storage device.
Describe how a magnetic storage device stores data.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [6]

(iii) Give two advantages of using a magnetic storage device rather than a solid state storage
device.
Advantage 1 ......................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
Advantage 2 .......................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [2]

3 5WOOGT2

5 The following text is stored as a text file:

She sells sea shells on the seashore. The shells that she sells are sea shells I am sure.
Explain how lossless compression would compress this file.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [5]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 233

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


6 (b) The law company wants to purchase a new file server.
The company can purchase a server with either solid state storage or magnetic storage. After
discussion, it decides to purchase a file server with magnetic storage.
Explain why the company chose magnetic storage rather than solid state storage.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [4]
(c) The law company also uses optical storage. Give three different examples of optical storage.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................ [3]
Q 22) Summer 2019 P12
2 A finance company uses off-line storage to archive their accounts.
(a) Explain what is meant by off-line storage.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The computers in the finance company use both primary and secondary storage.
(i) Give one example of primary storage.
1 ................................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give two examples of secondary storage.
1 .........................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................... [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 234

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


4 (a) Marley wants to store a video he has created for his school project.
He considers using a DVD or a Blu-ray to store the video.
Explain two differences between a DVD and a Blu-ray.
1 ........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) Marley also needs to store ten 8-bit colour images in a file for his project. Each image is 500
pixels wide and 300 pixels high. Calculate the total file size in megabytes (MB) for all Marley’s
images. Show all your working.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
File size ....................................................... MB [3]
7 (b) A microprocessor uses ROM. Explain what is meant by ROM.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 235

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 24) Winter 2019 P12
1 Computer memory size is measured in multiples of bytes. Four statements about computer
memory sizes are given in the table. Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if the statement is True or False. [4]

Statement True (‫)ض‬ False (‫)ض‬

25kB is larger than 100MB
999MB is larger than 50GB
3500kB is smaller than 2GB
2350bytes is smaller than 2kB

11 Robert has a mobile device that uses RAM, ROM and an SSD.
(a) State what the RAM, ROM and SSD are used for.
RAM ..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
ROM .........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
SSD ..........................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Give two reasons why an SSD, rather than a HDD, is used in the mobile device.
Reason 1 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ..................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
Q 25) March 20 P12
3 Priya studies music at school. She is buying a new computer to complete her school work at
home.
(a) Priya has a choice between an internal Hard Disk Drive (HDD) and an internal Solid State
Drive (SSD) to store data.
(i) Give one similarity between an HDD and an SSD.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain three differences between an HDD and an SSD.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 236

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
3 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Priya needs to transfer files between the school and her home computer.
Identify one off-line storage device she could use to transport the files.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Priya is using sound editing software to record and edit different music tracks.
(i) Identify two input devices she would use for this task.
Device 1 ............................................................................................................................
Device 2 ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Identify two output devices she would use for this task.
Device 1 ............................................................................................................................
Device 2 ............................................................................................................................ [2]
Q 26) Summer 20 P12) 9 (a) Six statements are given about storage devices. Tick (‫ )ض‬to show
if the statement applies to hard disk drive (HDD) storage or solid state drive (SSD) storage. Some
statements can apply to both. [6]
Statement HDD (‫)ض‬ SSD (‫)ض‬
It has a limited number of read/write cycles
It uses magnetic properties to store data
It has moving parts
It is non-volatile storage
It can be used as an external storage device to back up data
It uses flash memory to store data
(b) Optical storage is another type of storage.
Give two examples of optical storage.
Example 1 .................................................................................................................................
Example 2 ................................................................................................................................. [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 237

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 27) 15a Summer 20 P11) 1 (d) A smartphone needs both RAM and ROM.
State why a smartphone needs RAM and ROM.
RAM ..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
ROM .........................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
Q 28) Winter 20 P12
3 Alessandro has some important data stored on his computer.
(b) Alessandro uses an SSD to store his data.
Describe what is meant by an SSD and how it operates to store data.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Alessandro also uses off-line storage to store his data. Three examples of off-line storage are
Blu-ray, CD and DVD. Six statements are given about off-line storage. Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if each
statement applies to Blu-ray, CD, or DVD. Some statements apply to more than one example of
off-line storage. [6]
Statement Blu-ray (‫)ض‬ CD (‫)ض‬ DVD (‫)ض‬
A type of optical storage
Has the largest storage capacity
Can be dual layer
Read using a red laser
Has the smallest storage capacity
Stores data in a spiral track

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 238

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 29) Winter 20 P13
1 Five hardware devices are given.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if each device is an Input, Output or Storage device. [5]

Device Output (‫)ض‬ Storage (‫)ض‬

Input (‫)ض‬
Solid state drive
(SSD)
Headphones
2D cutter
LCD projector
Microphone

9 Elle uses both CDs and DVDs to store her school projects.
(a) Give three similarities between a CD and a DVD.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State one difference between a CD and a DVD.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Q 30) March 21 P12
1 (c) The hockey club wants to increase the number of people that can watch each match to 2000.
The 8-bit binary register may no longer be able to store the value.
Give the smallest number of bits that can be used to store the denary value 2000.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Working space
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
4 A supermarket sells many products. Each product has a barcode.
(b) The supermarket stores data using a Solid State Drive (SSD).
(i) Explain how an SSD stores data.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) One advantage of an SSD rather than a Hard Disk Drive (HDD) is that it has no moving parts,
so it is more durable. State one other advantage of the supermarket using SSD rather than HDD.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 239

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


18a Summer 21 P11
2 Julia inputs personal data into her computer. She stores three copies of the data using a hard
disk drive (HDD), a solid state drive (SSD) and a USB flash memory drive.
(a) Identify three devices Julia can use to input personal data into her computer.
Device 1 ....................................................................................................................................
Device 2 ...................................................................................................................................
Device 3 .................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Six statements are shown about HDDs, SSDs and USB flash memory drives.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show which statements apply to each type of storage. Some statements can apply to
more than one type of storage. [6]
HDD SSD USB flash
Statement
(‫)ض‬ (‫)ض‬ memory drive (‫)ض‬
it has no moving parts
it is non-volatile
it can use NAND gates to store data
it uses magnetic properties to store data
it has the smallest physical size
it has the slowest read/write speeds
(c) Julia uses a USB connection to transfer data onto her USB flash memory drive.
(i) One benefit of using a USB connection is that it is a universal connection.
State two other benefits of using a USB connection.
Benefit 1 ............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Benefit 2 ............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Identify the type of data transmission used in a USB connection.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 240

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



18b Summer 21 P12

2 Data storage can be magnetic, solid state or optical.
(a) Six statements are given about data storage. Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if the statement applies to
magnetic, solid state or optical storage. Some statements may apply to more than one. [6]
Statement Magnetic (‫)ض‬ Solid state (‫)ض‬ Optical(‫)ض‬
no moving parts are used to store data
pits and lands are used to store data
data is stored on platters
flash memory is used to store data
parts are rotated to store data
data can be stored permanently
(b) (i) Give one example of magnetic storage.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give one example of optical storage.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]


+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 241

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(iii) Identify which type of storage would be the most suitable for use in a web server and
justify your choice.
Type of storage ..................................................................................................................
Justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Describe the operation of USB flash memory and how it stores data.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 242

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 243

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



Marking Scheme
Q 1) Summer 2015 P11

Q 3) Winter 2015 P12

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 244

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



Q 4) Winter 2015 P13

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 245

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 9KPVGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 246

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 5WOOGT22

3 5WOOGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 247

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 9KPVGT2

3 9KPVGT2

3 /CTEJ+PFKC

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 248

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 5WOOGT2

3 5WOOGT2

3 9KPVGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 249

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 9KPVGT2

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 250

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 /CTEJ2 +PFKC 


3 5WOOGT2

3 5WOOGT2

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 251

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2

3 9KPVGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 252

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 /CTEJ2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 253

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 5WOOGT2


3 5WOOGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 254

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 9KPVGT2

3 9KPVGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 255

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 256

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 /CTEJ2

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 257

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2

3 C5WOOGT2

3 9KPVGT2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 258

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 9KPVGT2

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 259

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 /CTEJ2

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 260

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Chapter 7

1.3.6 Operating systems

Have Revised
Have Read
To Revise

Prepared
Learning Outcome
To Read

1.3.6: Operating systems

• describe the purpose of an operating system (Candidates will
be required to understand the purpose and function of an
operating system and why it is needed. They will not be
required to understand how operating systems work.)
• show understanding of the need for interrupts
Software:
Data and programs of computer are known as software.
There are two main types of software: systems software and application software
System Software
System software is a software that provides platform to other software.
Systems software includes the programs that are dedicated to managing the computer itself, such
as the operating system and utility software.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 261

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Operating System
An operating system (OS) is a type of system software that manages computer’s hardware and
software resources.
It provides common services for computer programs. An OS acts a link between the software and
the hardware. It controls and keeps a record of the execution of all other programs that are
present in the computer, including application programs and other system software.
Most operating systems comprise a large set of programs, only some of which are stored in the
computer’s memory all the time. Many of the routines available in the OS are stored on the hard
drive so that they can be accessed when required. This saves space in the computer’s main
memory.
When you are using applications software, you are not communicating directly with the computer
hardware. Your applications software communicates with OS program modules that communicate
with the computer hardware on its behalf. Without an operating system, a computer is useless no
matter how many programs you have.
Why an operating system is need?
An operating system is the most important software that runs on a computer. It manages
the computer's memory and processes, as well as all of its software and hardware. It also allows
you to communicate with the computer without knowing how to speak the computer's language.
The hardware is unusable without an OS. Operating system hides complexity of hardware from
user. It acts as an interface/ controls communications between user and hardware, hardware and
software. It provides software platform / environment on which other programs can be run.
Do all computer need an operating system?
Not all computers have operating systems. The computer that controls the microwave oven in your
kitchen, for example, doesn't need an operating system. It has one set of tasks to perform, very
straightforward input to expect (a numbered keypad and a few pre-set buttons) and simple, never-
changing hardware to control. For a computer like this, an operating system would be
unnecessary baggage, driving up the development and manufacturing costs significantly and
adding complexity where none is required. Instead, the computer in a microwave oven simply runs
a single hard-wired program all the time.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 262

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


The management tasks performed by the operating system are
1. Memory Management: The OS keeps track of every memory location and is responsible for
making memory available for different processes, such as allocating free space in memory to
programs. The OS also deals with virtual memory and swapping pages in and out of RAM.The OS
keeps track of the primary memory and allocates the memory when a process requests it.
x Memory protection to ensure that two programs do not try to use the same space
x Use of virtual memory
x Deciding which processes need to be in main memory at any one time
x Location of processes within the memory
x By example, e.g. when process terminates, memory is made available
2. File Management: Allocates and de-allocates the resources and decides who gets the
resources.
x Maintains directory structures
x Provides file naming conventions
x Controls access
3. Security: Prevents unauthorized access to programs and data by means of passwords.
x Makes provision for recovery when data is lost
x Provides usernames and passwords /encryption / user accounts
x Prevents unauthorised access
x Ensures privacy of data
4. Hardware Management
Programmers write software and users run this software. The software uses the hardware. The
operating system has to ensure that the hardware does what the software wants it to do. Program
development tools associated with a programming language allow a programmer to write a
program without needing to know the details of how the hardware, particularly the processor,
actually works. The operating system then has to provide the mechanism for the execution of the
developed program.
5. Process /resource management
A program, during execution is referred as a process. Many process are running in computer at a
time and each process needs access to computer resources.
The OS must manage the physical resources of the computer. Some resources are limited and
must be managed to maximise the use of the computer system:
- A simple system has only one processor.
- Secondary storage is of a fixed size.
- Some input/output devices (e.g. printers) are shared.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 263

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Following process management tasks are done by operating system:
x Scheduling of processes / multi-tasking / multi-programming etc.
x Resolution of conflicts when two or more processes require the same resource
6. Provision of a software platform/ environment
x The OS provides a platform on which the applications software can run.
7. Interrupt handling
Interrupts are signals sent be a hardware or a software or a user to seek attention of operating
system. Interrupts are handled by operating system like:
x Identifies priorities of interrupts
x Save current memory / process values /saves data on power outage
x Loads appropriate Interrupt Service Routine (ISR)
8. User- system interface
The OS provides a means of communication (the user interface) between the human user, or the
outside world, and the computer. A user interface is needed to allow the user to get the software
and hardware to do something useful. An operating system should provide at least the following
for user input and output:
• a command-line interface
• a graphical user interface (GUI).
9. Error-detecting Aids: Production of dumps, traces, error messages, and other debugging and
error-detecting methods.
10. Scheduling: The OS schedules process through its scheduling algorithms.
11. Device management
Every computer system has a variety of components that are categorised as 'devices'. Examples
include the monitor screen, the keyboard, the printer and the webcam. The management of these
requires:
x installation of the appropriate device driver software
x control of usage by processes.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 264

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Peripheral device control
Methods of communication between the OS and peripheral devices include the use of:
¾ Buffers: Temporary memory area in memory used to compensate the difference in speed of
two devices.
¾ Spooling: Acronym for simultaneous peripheral operations on-line, spooling refers to putting
jobs in a buffer, a special area in memory or on a disk where a device can access them when it
is ready. Spooling is useful because devices access data at different rates.
¾ Interrupts: A signal sent from a peripheral device (hardware) or program event (software) or
user to the operating system to indicate that the sender needs attention.
¾ Polling: The process carried out by an operating system of periodically interrogating each
peripheral device in turn to discover whether it needs the attention of operating system.
¾ Handshaking: The process by which two devices negotiate the protocol, (rules) they will use to
communicate for the rest of the session, or signal their readiness to send or receive data.

Interrupt
An interrupt is a signal/message from some device or software or user to indicate that some event
has occurred and the device is seeking the attention of the processor.

Steps of dealing with interrupt

Identify the source of the interrupt
Disable all interrupts of a lower priority
Save the contents of the registers onto Interrupt Handle
Load and run the appropriate ISR code to deal with the interrupt
Restore the registers from the interrupt handler
Enable all interrupts
Continue execution of the interrupted process
Interrupts need to be disabled so
that the process of dealing with
an interrupt is itself not
interrupted
Current task is saved in
Interrupt Handler

To identify, from where

interrupt is generated

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 265

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Role of Buffer and Interrupt in multi-tasking:
An interrupt is a signal/message from some device or software or user to indicate that some event
has occurred and the device is seeking the attention of the processor.
For example:
x A printer sends interrupt when printer is out of ink.
x An anti-virus software has detected a virus
x A user wants to cancel a command and has pressed Ctrl, Alt, Break simultaneously
Buffer is temporary memory area used to compensate difference in speed of two devices.
Hardware devices operate at much slower speeds than the processor. If it wasn’t for buffers,
processors would spend the majority of their time idle, waiting for the hardware device to complete
its operation. Interrupt and buffer play an important role in multi-tasking.
For example, in the process of printing, processor/operating system transfers the data from
memory to printer buffer, when buffer is full, the processor/operating system can carry on with
other tasks. The buffered in emptied to printer. When printer buffer is empty, printer sends an
interrupt to the processor requesting more data to be sent. If there is more data is to be printed,
processor refills the printer buffer and carry on with other tasks.

Buffers are also used, when streaming a video from the internet. This ensures that the video
playback doesn’t keep on stopping to wait for data from the internet.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 266

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 267

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


6QRKECN3WGUVKQPUHTQO2CUV2CRGTU
4 BZBTS
(a) What is meant by an interrupt?
…........................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................. …………………………………….[1]
(b) A user starts the printing of a document, and then carries on editing a second
document while printing continues.
Explain how interrupts make this possible.
………….……….………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………….…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………
…….……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [4]
(c) Once a week the user runs a virus checker.
What action will be taken if the virus checker detects a virus in a file?
............................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The computer is running a single-user operating system.
Describe what this means.
............................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................... [2]

4 BVBTS
(a) Describe the terms buffer and interrupt.
Buffer: ...............................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................... [2]
interrupt: .........................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) Explain the role of the buffer and interrupts when a large document of over 200 pages is
sent to a laser printer.
..........................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The use of two buffers would speed up the printing process. Explain why.
..........................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................... [2]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 268

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



6QRKECN2CUV2CRGTU
Q 1)8 State three features of a typical operating system.
1: .........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
2: ......................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
3: ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]

Q 2) Summer 2016 P11 & P13

4 (a) Nikita wishes to print out some documents and connects her printer to the computer using
one of the USB ports.
(iii) The printer runs out of paper while it is printing the documents. A signal is sent to the
processor to request that the problem is dealt with.
Name this type of signal.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 269

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 3) March 2017 India
6 The diagram shows five operating system functions and five descriptions.
Draw a line between each operating system function and its description. [4]

Function Description
Interrupt Many processes appear to run simultaneously

Utility Data are temporarily held in a buffer waiting

for an output device to access it

Memory A signal that causes the operating system to

management take a specified action

Spooling A program that performs a specific task

required for the operation of a computer
system

Multitasking A process of assigning blocks of memory to

programs running in a computer

Examiner Report
Nearly all candidates identified the correct description for most of the operating system functions.
Common errors included mixing up, ‘Interrupt’, ‘Memory management’ and/or ‘Spooling’

Q 4) Winter 2017 P12

6 Selma writes the following four answers in her Computer Science examination.
State which computer terms she is describing.
“It is a signal. When the signal is received it tells the operating system that an event has occurred.”
Selma is describing ..............................................................................................................
“It takes source code written in a high level language and translates it into machine code. It transla
tes the whole of the source code at once.”
Selma is describing ..............................................................................................................
“The part of the central processing unit (CPU) that carries out calculations.”
Selma is describing ..............................................................................................................
“When data is transmitted, if an error is detected in the data received a signal is sent to ask for the
data to be retransmitted. This continues until the data received is correct.”
Selma is describing ..........................................................................................................[4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 270

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 5) March 2018 P12 (India)
13 State four functions of an operating system.
Function 1 ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
Function 2 ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
Function 3 ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
Function 4 ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................[4]
Q 6) Winter 2018 P12
8 Describe the purpose of an interrupt in a computer system.
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................[4]
Q 7) Winter 2019 P13
7 (b) Computer systems often use interrupts. Five statements are given about interrupts.
Tick (9) to show if each statement is True or False. [5]
True False
Statement
(9) (9)
Interrupts can be hardware based or software based
Interrupts are handled by the operating system
Interrupts allow a computer to multitask
Interrupts work out which program to give priority to
Interrupts are vital to a computer and it cannot function without them

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 271

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Marking Scheme

3 9KPVGT2

3 5WOOGT22

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 272

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
3 /CTEJ+PFKC

3 9KPVGT2

3 /CTEJ2 +PFKC 

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 273

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
3 9KPVGT2

3 9KPVGT2


 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 274

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
%JCRVGT

1.3.7 High- and low-level languages and their translators

Revision Checklist
Have Revised

Learning Outcome
Have Read
To Revise

Prepared
To Read

1.3.7: High- and low-level languages and their translators

Show understanding of the need for both high-level and low-level
languages
Show understanding of the need for compilers when translating
programs written in a high-level language
Show understanding of the use of interpreters with high-level
language programs
Need for assemblers when translating programs written in assembly
language
Solving past paper questions

Programming Language:

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 275

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
“A set of rules that provide a way of telling computer what operation to perform is called a
Programming Language.”
A COMPUTER PROGRAM is a list of instructions that enable a computer to perform a specific
task. Computer needs instructions to perform a task.
There are some rules and regulations to write programs and these rules and regulations are
programming languages.
Different types of programming languages are given below:
1. Low Level Language (Machine Language and Assembly Language)
2. High level Languages (Python, Java, VB.net, C++ etc.)

1) Machine Language: (Low Level Language) Machine Language Code

Machine languages are the most basic languages. 000100101111010101001111010101
They consist of a series of current signals ‘On’ and ‘Off’. 0100010010100001111101010101111
On is represented by ‘1’ and off is represented by ‘0’. It is 0101000111110101011101100100110
1st generation of language. 000101010010101010111110111111
Machine language is also called Binary Digits. It is
computer’s language in which different parts of computer Machine Language Code
communicate with each other. 0s and 1s are called bit
12EF A243 4EC2 33C2 3D23 4E23
(binary digit).
4FFA CA12 ACEF F234 DE12 F98A
Machine language is easy for computer and difficult
for programmer. Every computer has its own unique
machine language. It means machine for Apple Macintosh is different from IBM compatible.

2) Assembly Language: (Low Level Language)

Assembly language consists of English like symbolic codes known as mnemonics. It is a second
generation of language.
They represent common strings of machine codes. A language translator, Assembler, is used to
convert source code of Assembly language program into object code of machine language. Though
Assembly languages are easier than machine language but
Assembly Code (Source code)
they are highly detailed and cryptic. So programmers
seldom write programs in Assembly language. LDD 101
Advantages of Assembly languages: ADD 102
• to make use of special hardware STO 103
• to make use of special machine-dependent instructions
• to write code that doesn’t take up much space in primary memory
• to write code that performs a task very quickly.
In order to understand this program the programmer needs to know that
• LDD means load the value of the variable from memory into the accumulator
• ADD means add the value of another variable to the value stored in the accumulator
• STO means store the value for accumulator into memory.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 276

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
3) High Level Languages
High-level languages consist of familiar English words as result programmers can read, write
and understand programs easily.
A language translator (compiler or interpreter) translates source code of High Level Language
into object code. That's why the program of High Level Language can be executed on any machine.

High Level Code (Source code)

For Count=1 to 10
Print ''Allah''
Next Count

High-level languages are designed with programmers in mind; programming statements are easier to
understand than those written in a low-level language. This means that programs written in a high-
level language are easier to:
• read and understand as the language used is closer to human language
• write in a shorter time
• debug at the development stage
• maintain once in use.
Examples: Python, COBOL, Pascal, FORTRAN, GWBASIC, C++, JAVA, VB.Net.

Source Code:
''A program written in any language except the machine language is called Source Code.''
Programmers can write programs in Machine Language, Assembly Language and High Level
Languages like COBOL, PASCAL, and GWBASIC etc. The programs, written in Assembly Language
or any High Level Language are called Source Code.

Object Code:
''A program written in Machine Language is called Object Code.''
Computer can understand only machine language code. Language translators converts source
code of High Level Language into machine code, these converted codes are Object Codes.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 277

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
Language Translator:
''Language Translators are programs that convert or translate the instructions in Assembly
Language or High Level Language i.e. source code into instructions of machine language i.e. object
codes are called Language Translators.''
Computer can understand only machine language. Programs written in Assembly Language and
High Level Language are translated into Machine Language so as computer can understand execute
them.

Source Code Language Object Code

(Program in Translator (Program
Assembly or High (Assembler, converted in
Level Language) Compiler or Machine
Interpreter) Language)

Following are three types of language translators:

1 Assembler:-
''Assembler is a language translator that translates source program written in Assembly
Language into object code in machine language.''
Computer can understand only machine language. Assemblers translate programs written in
Assembly Language into Machine Language so as computer can understand execute them.

Assembly
Machine Language
Language Assembler
Object Code
Source Code

2 Interpreters:-
''An interpreter is a language translator that translates source program written in High Level
Language into object code in machine language during step by step execution of program.''
Computer can only understand instruction written in machine language. Interpreters translate
one by one instruction of High Level Language source code into object code of Machine Language.
Interpreter translates one instruction which is executed before translation of next instruction. The
object code is not saved so the source code is interpreted every time before the execution.
Each high level language has its own language translator.

High Level Machine

Language Interpreter Language
Source Code Object Code

3 Compilers:-
''A compiler is a language translator that translates whole source program written in High Level


+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 278

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
Language into object code in machine language before execution of program.''
Compilers translate all instructions before executions. The object code is saved as object file,
which is executable. Object files don't need compiler or language for execution.

High Level Machine Language

Language Compiler  Object Code
Source Code (Executable file)

Compiler Interpreter Assembler

Translates a high-level Executes a high-level language Translates a low-level
language program into program a statement at a time. language program into
machine code. machine code.
An executable file of machine No executable file of machine An executable file of
code is produced. code is produced. machine code is produced.
One high-level language One high-level language program One low-level language
statement can be translated statement may require several statement is usually
into several machine code machine code instructions to be translated into one machine
instructions. executed. code instruction.
Compiled programs are used Interpreted programs cannot be Assembled programs can be
without the compiler. used without the interpreter. used without the assembler.

A compiled program is An interpreter is often used when An assembled program is

usually distributed for general a program is being developed. usually distributed for
use. general use.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 279

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
Syntax errors
An error due to which, a program can’t be executed is known as syntax error.
When a program is being compiled, if any syntax errors are found no translated program is
produced. Instead, a list of all the errors in the whole program is produced.

When a program is being interpreted, the interpreter performs the actions specified by each statement
until a syntax error is found.

Logic errors
Logical errors are the errors which don’t stop execution of program but the program don’t produced
required result.

Run-time error
An error that occurs during the execution of a program.
For example, Divide-by-zero error or running out of
memory will often cause a runtime error.

Integrated/Interactive Development Environment (IDE)

Most high-level programming languages offer the use of an
IDE for program development. This contains an editor with
an interpreter and/or compiler together with debugging
tools, which can improve the speed of program
development.

 

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 280

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
'ZCO5V[NG3WGUVKQPU
Q1) A syntax error can occur when writing a program.
(a) State what is meant by a syntax error, giving an example.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe tools and facilities available in an integrated development environment (IDE) which
can help the programmer to identify and correct syntax errors.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................ [4]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 281

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
6QRKECN3WGUVKQPUHTQO2CUV2CRGTU
Q 1) Summer 2015 P11
10 Five statements about interpreters and compilers are shown in the table below. Study each
statement. Tick (9) to show whether the statement refers to an interpreter or to a compiler. [5]

Statement Interpreter Compiler

takes one statement at a time and executes it
generates an error report at the end of translation
of the whole program
stops the translation process as soon as the first
error is encountered
slow speed of execution of program loops
translates the entire program in one go

Q 2) Summer 2015 P12

9 (a) Five statements about interpreters and compilers are shown in the table below.
Study each statement.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show whether the statement refers to an interpreter or to a compiler.
Statement Interpreter Compiler
creates an executable file that runs directly on the computer
more likely to crash the computer since the machine code
produced runs directly on the processor
easier to debug since each line of code is analysed and
checked before being executed
slow speed of execution of program loops
it is more difficult to modify the executable code, since it is in
machine code format
(b) State why a compiler or an interpreter is needed when running a high-level program on a
computer.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................[1]

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 282

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
(e) Study the following three sections of code.
A B C
1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 LDA X FOR x ← 1 TO 10
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 INC X READ n
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 STA Y ENDFOR
Identify, using the letters A, B or C, which of the above codes is an example of assembly code, high-
level language code or machine code:
Assembly code ....................................................................................................................
High-level language code .................................................................................................
Machine code ...............................................................................................................[2]
Q 3) Summer 2016 P12
Complete the following by writing either compiler, interpreter or assembler in the spaces provided.[3]
......................................................... – translates source code into object code.
......................................................... – translates low-level language into machine code.
......................................................... – stops the execution of a program as soon as it
encounters an error.
Q 4) Winter 2016 P12
1 (a) Give two reasons why a programmer would choose to write code in a low-level language.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) High-level languages require either an interpreter or a compiler to translate the program.
The table below lists a number of statements about language translators.
Tick (3) to show which statements refer to interpreters and which refer to compilers. [5]
Statements Interpreter Compiler
Translates the source code into machine code all at once
Produces an executable file in machine code
Executes a high-level language program one instruction
at a time
Once translated, the translator does not need to be
present for the program to run
An executable file is produced

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 283

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

^3 D J H 
Q 5) Winter 2016 P11& 13
6 High-level or low-level languages can be used when writing a computer program.
State two advantages of using a high-level language and two advantages of using a low-level
language.
High-level language advantage 1 ....................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
High-level language advantage 2 ....................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Low-level language advantage 1 .....................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Low-level language advantage 2 .....................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................... [4]
8 Four descriptions about compilers and interpreters are shown below.
Draw lines to indicate which descriptions refer to a compiler and which descriptions refer to an
interpreter. [4]
Description

It is more difficult to debug the code since one error

can produce many other associated errors.

The speed of execution of program loops is slower. Compiler

It produces fast, executable code that runs directly

Interpreter
on the processor.

It is easier to debug the code since an error is

displayed as soon as it is found.
Q 8) Winter 2017 P13
10 Six statements about assembly language are shown.
Tick whether the statement is true or false. [6]
Statement True False
Assembly language uses mnemonic codes.
Assembly language programs do not need a translator to be executed.
Assembly language is a low-level programming language.
Assembly language is specific to the computer hardware.
Assembly language is machine code.
Assembly language is often used to create drivers for hardware.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 284

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 6) March 2017 India
11 Three programmers are working on different projects:
• Alice is developing a program written in a low-level language
• Akbar is developing a program written in a high-level language
• Alex is preparing a program written in a high-level language for sale
State, with reasons, which type of translator each programmer should use. Each programmer
should be using a different type of translator.
Alice ........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
Akbar ......................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Alex .........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [6]
Q 7) Summer 2017 P11
2 Programmers can use a high-level language to write a computer program.
(a) Explain what is meant by the term ‘high-level language’.

……..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) A program written in a high-level language is translated into machine code. This is so that it can
be processed by a computer. Name one type of translator that can be used.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) Describe how your answer to part (b) translates this program.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 285

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 9) Summer 2018 P11
7 Translators, such as a compiler and an interpreter, are used when writing and running computer pro
grams. Describe how a compiler and an interpreter translates a computer program.
Compiler .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
Interpreter ...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [6]
Q 10) Summer 2018 P12
8 Dimitri is writing a computer program in a high-level language.
He needs to send just the machine code for the program to his friend, electronically. It is important tha
t the program is executed as quickly as possible. Identify which translator will be most suitable for Di
mitri to use. Explain your choice.
Type of translator ..................................................................................................................
Explanation ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. [4]

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 286

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 11) Winter 2018 P12
6 (a) Many programmers write computer programs in high-level languages. The programs need to
be translated into machine code to be read by the computer.
State two types of translator that can be used.
Translator 1 ...............................................................................................................................
Translator 2 ............................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain two reasons why a computer programmer may choose to write a program in a high level
language, rather than a low-level language.
Reason 1 ............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
Q 12) Winter 2018 P13
7 David is writing a program using a high-level language. The program will be published and sold for
profit.
(a) David uses an interpreter when creating the computer program. State three features of an
interpreter.
Feature 1 ....................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................
Feature 2 ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
Feature 3 .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [3]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 287

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) David compiles the program when he has completed it. Explain two benefits of compiling the
program.
Benefit 1 .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
Benefit 2 .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [4]
Q 13) March 2019 P12
4 Darius is writing a computer program that allows binary values to be calculated.
Darius chooses to write the program in a high-level language rather than a low-level language.
(a) Explain why Darius chooses to write the program in a high-level language.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Darius will use a translator to translate the program. He could use a compiler or an interpreter.
Five statements are given about compilers and interpreters.
Tick (9) to show if the statement applies to a Compiler or an Interpreter. Statements may apply to
both. [5]

Statement Compiler (9) Interpreter (9)

A report of errors is produced at the end of translation.
The program is translated one line at a time.
The program is translated from high-level language into
machine code.
An executable file is produced.
The program will not run at all if an error is detected.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 288

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 14) Summer 2019 P11
7 Annie writes a paragraph of text as an answer to an examination question about programming
languages. Using the list given, complete Annie’s answer by inserting the correct six missing terms.
Not all terms will be used.
• Assembly • Converter • Denary • Hexadecimal
• High-level language • Low-level language • Machine Code • Source Code
• Syntax • Translator
The structure of language statements in a computer program is called the ................................. .
A programming language that uses natural language statements is called a ...................................
When programs are written in this type of language they need a ............................................. to
convert them into ....................................................................... .
A programming language that is written using mnemonic codes is
called ....................................................................... language. This is an example of
a ....................................................................... . [6]
Q 15) Winter 2019 P13) 2 A programmer uses a high-level language to write a computer program. [4]
(a) Four statements are given about high-level programming languages. Tick to show True or False.
Statement True False
High-level languages need to be translated into machine code to run
on a computer
High-level languages are written using mnemonic codes
High-level languages are specific to the computer’s hardware
High-level languages are portable languages
Q 16) March 20 P12) 4 Assemblers, compilers and interpreters are types of translators. [5]
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show which statements apply to each translator. Each statement may apply to more than o
ne type of translator.
Assemble Interprete
Statement Compiler
r r
Translates low-level language to machine code
Translates high-level language to machine code
Produces error messages
Translates high-level language one line at a time




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 289

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Produces an executable file

Q 17) Summer 20 P12

2 Both an interpreter and a compiler can be used when writing a program in a high-level language.
(a) Explain why a programmer would make use of both an interpreter and a compiler.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Give three reasons why a programmer would choose to write a program in a high-level language,
instead of a low-level language.
Reason 1 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason 3 ..................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
Q 18) 15a Summer 20 P11) 9 Programs can be written in a low-level language.
(a) Identify three features of a low-level language.
Feature 1 ..................................................................................................................................
Feature 2 ..................................................................................................................................
Feature 3 .................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Give two examples of a low-level language.
Example 1 .................................................................................................................................
Example 2 ................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Give one drawback of writing programs in a low-level language.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 290

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


18c Summer 21 P13) 5 Six statements are given about programming languages.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show whether each statement applies to high-level language, assembly language or
machine code. Some statements may apply to more than one type of programming language. [6]
High-level Assembly Machine
Statement language language code
(‫)ض‬ (‫)ض‬ (‫)ض‬
it requires a translator to be processed by a computer
it is an example of low-level language
it uses mnemonics
it uses English-like statements
it can be used to directly manipulate hardware in the
computer
it is portable

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 291

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Marking Scheme

3 5WOOGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 292

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 5WOOGT2

3 9KPVGT2

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 293

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 294

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 /CTEJ+PFKC

3 5WOOGT2

3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 295

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2

3 5WOOGT2

3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 296

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 9KPVGT2

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 297

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 /CTEJ2

3 5WOOGT2

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 298

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2

3 /CTEJ2

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 299

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2

3 C5WOOGT2

3 /CTEJ2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 300

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 301

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



Chapter 4

1.4 Security aspects

Have Read
To Revise

Prepared
To Read
Learning Outcome

Have
1.2.2: Security aspects
Show understanding of the security aspects of using the Internet and
understand what methods are available to help minimise the risks
Show understanding of the Internet risks associated with malware, including
viruses, spyware and hacking
Explain how anti-virus and other protection software helps to protect the user
from security risks (this also links into section 1.4 of the syllabus)
1.4 Data integrity and security
Show understanding of how data are kept safe when stored and transmitted,
including:
○ use of passwords, both entered at a keyboard and biometric
○ use of firewalls, both software and hardware, including proxy servers
○ use of security protocols such as Secure Socket Layer (SSL) and Transport
Layer Security (TLS)
○ use of symmetric encryption (plain text, cypher text and use of a key)
showing understanding that increasing the length of a key increases the
strength of the encryption
Show understanding of the need to keep online systems safe from attacks
including denial of service attacks, phishing, pharming
Show understanding of the need to keep data safe from accidental damage,
including corruption and human errors



+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 302

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



Have Read
To Revise

Prepared
To Read
Learning Outcome

Have
Show understanding of the need to keep data safe from malicious actions,
including unauthorised viewing, deleting, copying and corruption
Describe how the knowledge from 1.4.1, 1.4.2 and 1.4.3 can be applied to
real-life scenarios including, for example, online banking, shopping

Data Integrity and security

Data integrity refers to maintaining and assuring the accuracy and consistency of data over its
entire life-cycle, and is a critical aspect to the design, implementation and usage of any system which
stores, processes, or retrieves data.
Data security is about keeping data safe. Many individuals, small businesses and major companies
rely heavily on their computer systems.
If the data on these computer systems is damaged, lost, or stolen, it can lead to disaster.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 303

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Loss of Data
Data loss is any process or event that results in data being corrupted, deleted and/or
made unreadable by a user and/or software or application. It occurs when one or
more data elements can no longer be utilized by the data owner or requesting
application. Data loss is also known as data leakage.
Reason Pre-caution/ Method of Recovery
Accidental deletion x Back-up
x Saving on regular basis
x Use of password so as unauthorised person can’t delete data.
Hardware failure x Back-up
x UPS (to prevent loss of data from power failure)
x Saving on regular basis
x Parallel back-up hardware
Software failure x Back-up
x Saving on regular basis
Incorrect computer x Back-up
operation x Shut down computer properly
x Remove external storage properly
Natural Disaster x Back-up
Computer virus is program or code that replicates itself and is designed to amend, delete or copy data
and files on a user’s computer without their consent.
Viruses are developed with intention to harm other computer data and programs.
Worms and Trojan horse are also types of virus.
A worm is a program that actively transmits itself over a network to infect other computers.
A Trojan horse is any program that invites the user to run it, concealing harmful or malicious code.
A Trojan horse is any program that invites the user to run it, concealing harmful or malicious code.
Security Risk:
x Can delete or corrupt data and programs
x Can disrupt computer,
x Can cause computer stop working “hung”
Methods to remove risk
x Install antivirus
x Download data/programs only from authentic source
x Scan before opening email attachments or data from external source
x Install firewall




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 304

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Spyware
Spyware/key-logging is software that monitors key presses on a user’s keyboard, and relays the
information back to the person who sent the software.
Spyware is a form of malware that hides on your device, monitors your activity, and steals sensitive
information like bank details and passwords.

Security Risk:
x Transmits all data typed by user to the originator of spyware e.g. email/bank id and passwords,
debit/credit card number etc.
x Can read cookies.
x Can change default web browser
x Can install other spyware
Methods to remove risk
x Install anti-spyware software
x Install firewall
x Use on-screen keyboard to type user id
and passwords
War Driving
War driving is the act of searching for Wi-Fi wireless networks by a person usually in a moving vehicle,
using a laptop or Smartphone. It is also known as Access-Point Mapping.
Security Risk
x Uses user’s internet data/time
x May hack password and personal data
Methods to remove risk
x Use complex password
x Limit the number of users
x Firewall
x Use wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 305

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Phishing
Phishing is the act of attempting to acquire sensitive information like usernames, passwords and
credit card details by disguising as a trustworthy source. Phishing is carried out through emails or by
luring the users to enter personal information through fake websites. Criminals often use websites
that have a look and feel of some popular website, which makes the users feel safe to enter their
details there.

Protection
1. The most powerful weapon against phishing is common sense and the following rules that
every user should oblige to.
2. If you are not a customer of the site delete the email immediately. Don´t click on the link or
reply.
3. If you are a customer and you are not sure if the email is legit do one of the following:
a) Contact the institute by phone or contact at the official website (do not use the email link of
course) and ask if the mail is official.
b) Instead of using the link provided open the website by typing in the official link there. The site



+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 306

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


should have news about the email on their starting page. (Most of the time). If not, use 3a to
verify the email.
Pharming:
Pharming in Simple Steps:
x Hacker creates a fake website which appears similar to the original website.
x Hacker poisons the DNS servers thus domain names are resolved into fake IP address.
x User types the URL of the original website in the browser.
x The DNS server directs User to the fake website designed by hacker.
x User not knowing that it is a fake website, shares his confidential information such as login,
password etc.
x Hacker gets the user confidential information from his fake web site and uses it to access the original
website.
x Hacker exploits user's confidential information to his liking.

Protection
x Check the URL of any site that asks you to provide personal information. Make sure your session
begins at the known authentic address of the site, with no additional characters appended to it.
x Use a trusted, legitimate Internet Service Provider. Rigorous security at the ISP level is your first
line of defense against pharming.
x Check the certificate. It takes just a few seconds to tell if a site you land on is legitimate.
x Block suspicious Websites automatically




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 307

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


x
Identify fake website
A B

Differences between Phishing and Pharming

S No Phishing Pharming

Hacking
Hacking is unauthorized use of computer and network resources.
The activity of breaking into a computer system to gain an unauthorized access is known as hacking.
The act of defeating the security capabilities of a computer system in order to obtain an illegal access
to the information stored on the computer system is called hacking.
Protection:
¾ Make your passwords long and complicated, and with a good mix of letters and numbers, as
well as utilizing case-sensitive letters. Don't use anything familiar, such as your birthday, your
children's names or anything like that. If a hacker wants to attempt to break into your email accounts,
at least make him work for it.
¾ Don't ever allow your browser to remember your passwords. True, it may be a bit of an
inconvenience to enter your password every time you log in.
¾ Activate Firewall




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 308

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Firewall
a firewall is a network security system that monitors and controls incoming and outgoing network
traffic based on predetermined security rules. A firewall typically establishes a barrier between a
trusted internal network and un-trusted external network, such as the Internet.
Firewalls can be implemented as
both hardware and software, or a
combination of both. Network
firewalls are frequently used to
prevent unauthorized Internet users
from accessing private networks
connected to the Internet,
especially intranets. All messages
entering or leaving the intranet
pass through the firewall, which examines each message and blocks those that do not meet the
specified security criteria.

Functions of firewall
x Monitors incoming and outgoing traffic
x checking whether incoming or outgoing data meets a given set of criteria
x if the data fails the criteria, the firewall will block the ‘traffic’ and give the user(or network manager)
a warning that there may be a security issue
x logging all incoming and outgoing ‘traffic’ to allow later interrogation by the user(or network
manager)
x criteria can be set to prevent access to certain undesirable sites; the firewall can keep a list of all
undesirable IP addresses
x helping to prevent viruses or hackers entering the user’s computer (or internal network)
x warning the user if some software on their system is trying to access an external data source (e.g.
automatic software upgrade); the user is given the option of allowing it to go ahead or requesting
that such access is denied.
It is often referred to in this case as a GATEWAY. Alternatively, the firewall can be software installed
on a computer; in some cases, this is part of the operating system.
Limitations of firewall




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 309

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


x it cannot prevent individuals, on internal networks, using their own modems to bypass the firewall
x employee misconduct or carelessness cannot be controlled by firewalls (for
example, control of passwords or use of accounts)
x users on stand-alone computers can chose to disable the firewall, leaving their computer open to
harmful ‘traffic’ from the internet.
x All of these issues require management control or personal control (on a single computer) to
ensure that the firewall is allowed to do its job effectively.

Proxy server
A proxy server is a dedicated computer system running on a network that acts as an intermediary
between a client application, such as a Web browser, and a real server.
how proxy servers work:
When a proxy server receives a
request for an Internet resource
(such as a Web page), it looks in
its local cache of previously
pages. If it finds the page, it
returns it to the user without
needing to forward the request to
the Internet. If the page is not in
the cache, the proxy server, acting as a client on behalf of the user, uses one of its own IP
addresses to request the page from the server out on the Internet. When the page is returned, the
proxy server relates it to the original request and forwards it on to the user.
Functions of proxy servers include:
x allowing the internet ‘traffic’ to be filtered; they can block access to a website if necessary (similar
type or reaction as a firewall)
x by using the feature known as a CACHE, they can speed up access to information from a website;
when the website is first visited, the home page is stored on the proxy server; when the user next
visits the website, it now goes through the proxy server cache instead, giving much faster access
x keeping the user’s IP address secret – this clearly improves security
x acting as a firewall.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 310

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

Security Certificates

https://www.us-cert.gov/ncas/tips/ST04-014
If an organization wants to have a secure web site that uses encryption, it needs to obtain a site, or
host, certificate.
There are two elements:
¾ a closed padlock,
¾ URL that begins with "https:" rather than "http:"
If a web site has a valid certificate, it means that a certificate authority has
taken steps to verify that the web address actually belongs to that
organization. When you type a URL or follow a link to a secure web site, your
browser will check the certificate for the following characteristics:
1. The web site address matches the address on the certificate
2. The certificate is signed by a certificate authority that the browser recognizes as a "trusted"
authority
If the browser senses a problem, it may present you with a dialog box that claims that there is an error
with the site certificate.
If you have chosen not to trust the company who issued the certificate, or if the certificate has expired.
You will usually be presented with the option to examine the certificate, after which you can accept the
certificate forever, accept it only for that particular visit, or choose not to accept it.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 311

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Security protocols
There are two forms of security protocols when using the internet:
• Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
• Transport Layer Security (TLS).
SECURE SOCKETS LAYER (SSL) is a type of protocol (a set of rules used by computers to
communicate with each other across a network). This allows data to be sent and received securely
over the internet.
When a user logs onto a website, SSL encrypts the data – only the user’s computer and the web server
are able to make sense of what is being transmitted. A user will know if SSL is being applied when they
see https or the small padlock in the status bar at the top of the screen. So what happens when a user
wants to access a secure website and receive and send data to it?


TRANSPORT LAYER SECURITY (TLS) is similar to SSL but is a more recent security system. TLS is
a form of protocol that ensures the security and privacy of data between devices and users when
communicating over the internet. It is essentially designed to provide encryption, authentication and
data integrity in a more effective way than its predecessor SSL.
When a website and client (user) communicate over the internet, TLS is designed to prevent a third
party hacking into this communication causing problems with data security.
TLS is formed of two layers:
• Record protocol: this part of the communication can be used with or without encryption (it contains
the data being transferred over the internet).
• handshake protocol: this permits the website and the client (user) to authenticate each other and to
make use of encryption algorithms (a secure session between client and website is established).Only




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 312

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


the most recent web browsers support both SSL and TLS which is why the older SSL is still used in
many cases. But what are the main differences between SSL and TLS since they both effectively do
the same thing?
• It is possible to extend TLS by adding new authentication methods.
• TLS can make use of SESSION CACHING which improves the overall performance 158 compared
to SSL.
• TLS separates the handshaking process from the record protocol (layer) which holds all the data.
Session caching
When opening a TLS session, it requires a lot of computer time (due mainly to the complex encryption
keys being used). The use of session caching can avoid the need to utilise so much computer time for
each connection. TLS can either establish a new session or attempt to resume an existing session;
using the latter can considerably boost system performance.
Summer 2015 P12
(a) State what is meant by the term SSL.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The following stages take place when a user wishes to access a secure website.
Put each stage in sequence by writing the numbers 1 to 6 in the column on the right. The first one has
been done for you. [5]
Stage Sequence
number
the encrypted data is then shared securely between the web browser and
the web server
the web browser attempts to connect to a website which is secured by SSL 1
the web server sends the web browser a copy of its SSL certificate
the web browser requests the web server to identify itself
the web server will then send back some form of acknowledgement to allow
the SSL encrypted session to begin
the web browser checks whether the SSL certificate is trustworthy; if it is,
then the web browser sends a message back to the web server
0DUNLQJ6FKHPH
(a) Any one from:
− Secure sockets layer − encrypts data being transmitted
− Use of https − use public and private keys [1]
(b) 1 mark for each number in the correct order, next to the correct stage.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 313

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Stage Sequence
number
the encrypted data is then shared securely between the web browser and the web server 
the web browser attempts to connect to a website which is secured by SSL 1
the web server sends the web browser a copy of its SSL certificate 
the web browser requests the web server to identify itself 
the web server will then send back some form of acknowledgement to allow the SSL 
encrypted session to begin
the web browser checks whether the SSL certificate is trustworthy; if it is, then the web 
browser sends a message back to the web server

Data Encryption
Encryption is the conversion of electronic data into another form, called cipher text, which cannot be
easily understood by anyone except authorized parties.
The word encryption comes from the Greek word kryptos, meaning hidden or secret.

Caesar Cipher (Encryption)

The earliest known and simplest ciphers. The method is named after Julius Caesar.
It is a type of substitution cipher in which each letter in the plaintext is 'shifted' a certain number of
places down the alphabet.
For example, with a shift of -4, A would be replaced by X, D would become 4, and so on.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 314

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

Encryption makes the data meaningless unless the recipient has the necessary decryption tools.
There are two types of encryption:
SYMMETRIC ENCRYPTION is a method of encryption in which one key is required to encrypt and
decrypt the data.
ASYMMETRIC ENCRYPTION (also known as Public Key Encryption)is a method of encryption in which
one key (public key) is required to encrypt and other key (private key) to decrypt the data.
Symmetric Encryption

KEY Distribution Problem:

In symmetric key encryption the sender has to supply the encryption key to the recipient. But this key
could be hacked, which puts the security of the encrypted message at risk. This problem is known as
key distribution problem.

ASYMMETRIC (PUBLIC KEY) ENCRYPTION

Public-key encryption is a cryptographic system that uses two keys
-- a public key known to everyone
-- and a private or secret key known only to the owner of the key.
If a message is encrypted by Public key it can only be decrypted by associated Private key.
If a message is encrypted by private key it can only be decrypted by associated public key.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 315

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

Example 1: When Bob wants to send a secure message to Alice, he uses Alice’s public key
to encrypt the message. Alice then uses her private key to decrypt it.(To make not-understandable for
others)

Example 2: When Alice wants to ensure that the message is sent by her (to verify the sender and
message is not altered, not to make message secure (not-understandable by others)),
she encrypts her message using her own private key.
Then the message is transmitted to Bob.
Bob decrypts the message using Alice’s public key.
The decryption of message by Alice’s public key confirms that this is Alice’s message, and is without
any alteration.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 316

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Digital certificates
Digital certificates are used in Internet communications. A
Certificate Authority (CA) is responsible for issuing digital
certificates. It
contains Name of certification authority, Public key of
company and Expiry date.
The method of issuing a digital certificate is as follows:
1. A user starts an application for a digital certificate using
their computer. On this computer a key pair is
generated. This key pair consists of a public key and an
associated private key.
2. The user submits the application to the CA. The
generated public key and other application data are
sent.
3. The key and data are encrypted using the CA’s public key
before sending to CA.
4. The CA creates a digital document containing all necessary data items and signs it using the CA’s
private key.
5. The CA sends the digital certificate to the individual.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 317

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

HASHING ALGORITHM
The hashing algorithm takes a message or a key and translates it into a string of characters usually
shown in hexadecimals essentially makes the message or key almost impossible to read
‘meaningless’ text. This is also known as message digest.

Plain Text
1234 5678 9012 3456
Message Digest Algo 4 MD4

Cypher Text
543FC7DDEA0CF5EAF84279CBADCA180D

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 318

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Authentication
Authentication means the receiver is certain who sent the cipher text.
For authentication passwords, digital certificates and digital signatures are used/
Digital signature
A digital signature is a mathematical scheme for verifying the authenticity of digital messages or
documents. A valid digital signature gives a recipient reason to believe that the message was created
by a known sender (authentication), that the sender cannot deny having sent the message (non-
repudiation), and that the message was not altered in transit.
How digital signature works
x Sender applies HASH algorithm on the message.
x Message digest is created.
x Sender encrypts the message digest using his own private key. This encrypted message digest is
called Digital Signature.
x Plain text along with digital signature is sent to recipient.

Receiver receives both plain message and digital signature

Receiver applies the same HASH algorithm on message and obtains message digest
Receiver then encrypts the receiving digital signature using sender’s public key to obtain sender’s
message digest.
Receiver compares his own generated message digest with the sender’s message digest.
If both matches then message is sent from the intended source.
Digital signature is used to identify the sender.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 319

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



DENIAL OF SERVICE ATTACKS

A denial of service attack (DoS) is an attempt at preventing users from accessing part of a network,
notably an internet server.
The attacker may be able to prevent a user from:
™ accessing their emails
™ accessing websites/web pages
™ accessing online services (such as
banking).
One method of attack is to flood the
network with useless traffic.
When a user types in or clicks on a URL of a
website (using their web browser), a request
is sent to the internet server which contains
the website or web page.
Obviously, the server can only handle a finite
number of requests. So if it becomes
overloaded by an attacker sending out
thousands of requests, it won’t be able to
service the user’s legitimate request. This is effectively a denial of service.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 320

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Specimen Paper 2015
Q1) In a simple symmetric encryption system, each letter of the alphabet is substituted with another.
The plain text message:
The Quick brown Fox jumps over a lazy dog.
becomes the cypher text message:
Zag towns jumpy Dmh coilv mwgu f bfke rmq

(a) (i) Convert these words to cypher text.

Computer Science
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Decode this cypher text message.
NV pwza Wytwbfj
.................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Both the person who sends the message and the person who receives it need to know what the
substitution key is, and they need to keep this secret. A copy of the
substitution key has been sent using SSL transmission.
Explain why this keeps the copy of the key secret during transmission.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) A user downloads software from the Internet.
(i) State what should be part of the download to provide proof that the software is authentic?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe the process for ensuring that the software is both authentic and has not been altered.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................[4]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 321

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



Q 3) Digital certificates are used in Internet communications. A Certificate Authority (CA) is

responsible for issuing digital certificates.
(a) Name three data items present in a digital certificate.
1 ..............................................................................................................................................
2 .............................................................................................................................................
3 .........................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The method of issuing a digital certificate is as follows:
1 A user starts an application for a digital certificate using their computer. On this computer a key pair
is generated. This key pair consists of a public key and an associated private key.
2 The user submits the application to the CA. The generated ........(i) ........key and other application
data are sent. The key and data are encrypted using the CA’s ........(ii) ........key.
3 The CA creates a digital document containing all necessary data items and signs it using the
CA’s ........(iii) ........key.
4 The CA sends the digital certificate to the individual. In the above method there are three missing
words. Each missing word is either ‘public’ or ‘private’. State the correct word. Justify your choice.
(i) ...........................................................................................................................................
Justification ........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) ...........................................................................................................................................
Justification ........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) ...........................................................................................................................................
Justification ........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 322

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(c) Alexa sends an email to Beena.
Alexa’s email program:
• produces a message digest (hash)
• uses Alexa’s private key to encrypt the message digest
• adds the encrypted message digest to the plain text of her message
• encrypts the whole message with Beena’s public key
• sends the encrypted message with a copy of Alexa’s digital certificate
Beena’s email program decrypts the encrypted message using her private key.
(i) State the name given to the encrypted message digest.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how Beena can be sure that she has received a message that is authentic (not corrupted
or tampered with) and that it came from Alexa.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................[2]
(iii) Name two uses where encrypted message digests are advisable.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ....................................................................................................................................[2]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 323

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 324

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



Candidate Example Response




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 325

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 326

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 327

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 328

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 329

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 330

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 331

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 332

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 333

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 334

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 335

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 336

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



Past Papers
3 5WOOGT2
4 Choose six correct terms from the following list to complete the spaces in the paragraphs below:
• encryption • file name • firewall
• HTML tags/text • IP address • protocol
• proxy server • SSL certificate • web server name
A user enters a URL. The web browser breaks up the URL into three components:
1 ........................................................
2 ........................................................
3 ........................................................
The web server returns the selected web page.
The web browser reads the ............................................................ from the selected page and shows
the correctly formatted page on the user’s screen.
A ............................................................ is used between the user’s computer and the network to
examine the data traffic to make sure it meets certain criteria.
To speed up the access to the web pages next time, a ........................................... is used between
the computer and web server; this device uses a cache to store the website home page after it has
been accessed for the first time. [6]
ExaminerĜs Comments on Question 4
The full range of marks were awarded to candidates for this question. It was clear some candidates knew the process and gained full
marks, but most candidates achieved two or three marks.

6 (a) Viruses, pharming and phishing are all examples of potential Internet security issues. Explain
what is meant by each of these three terms.
Virus: .......................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................
Pharming: ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................
Phishing: ..................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................[6]
(b) An online bank requires a client to supply an 8-digit code each time they
wish to access their account on the bank’s website.
2 5 1
Rather than ask the client to use a keyboard, they are requested to use an on- 6 8 3
screen keypad (shown on the right) to input the 8-digit code.
The position of the digits on the keypad can change each time the website is 9 0 4
visited.
The client uses a mouse or touch screen to select each of the8 digits. 7
(i) Explain why the bank has chosen to use this method of entering the 8 digits.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
................................................. [2]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 337

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(ii) Name and describe another measure that the bank could introduce to improve the security of
their website.
Name: ......................................................................................................................
Description: ..............................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
3 9KPVGT2
1 There are a number of security risks associated with using the Internet.
Name three of these risks. For each, state why it is a risk and describe how the risk can be
minimised.
Security risk 1: .....................................................................................................................
Why it is a risk: ...................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
How to minimize the risk:....................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
Security risk 2: .....................................................................................................................
Why it is a risk: ...................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
How to minimize the risk: ....................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
Security risk 3: .....................................................................................................................
Why it is a risk: ...................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
How to minimize the risk: ....................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ [9]
3 9KPVGT2
4 (b) The four statements below refer to firewalls and proxy servers. Study each statement.
Tick (9) the appropriate column(s) to indicate whether the statement refers to a firewall and/or a proxy
server. [4]
Statement Firewall Proxy
server
Speeds up access of information from a web server by using a
cache
Filters all Internet traffic coming into and out from a user’s
computer, intranet or private network
Helps to prevent malware, including viruses, from entering a
user’s computer
Keeps a list of undesirable websites and IP addresses
(c) Explain three ways of preventing accidental loss or corruption of data.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 338

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


2 ........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................
3 .........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................. [6]

10 Choose five correct terms from the following list to complete the spaces in the sentences below:
• cypher text • encryption algorithm • encryption key
• firewall • plain text • proxy server
• symmetric encryption
....................................................................................... is a security system.
It uses the same ....................................................................... to encrypt and decrypt a message.
Before encryption, the message is called ......................................................... .
The ..................................................................................... processes the original message. The
output is known as ........................................................................... . [5]

3 9KPVGT2
3 (a) Three statements about cookies are shown below.
Study each statement. Tick to show whether the statement is true or false. [3]
Statement True False
Cookies can destroy or modify data in a computer without the user’s
knowledge
Cookies generate website pop-ups
Cookies allow a website to detect whether a viewer has viewed
specific web pages

6 (a) State what is meant by encryption.

.................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State what is meant by symmetric encryption.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Complete the diagram: [1]

13 Identify which five computer terms are being described below.

(a) A system designed to prevent unauthorised access to or from a private network or intranet; it
examines all data traffic to and from the network and filters out anything that does not meet certain
criteria.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 339

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) Software that can be used on a trial basis before buying the full version; it often does not include
all the features of the full version or has a time limit before it stops working.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A protocol for transmitting private documents via the Internet; it uses two keys to encrypt the data
– a public key and a private key.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A standard adopted by the electronic music industry for controlling devices that produce music,
such as synthesisers and sound cards.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) A device that allows audio signals to be converted into electrical signals which can be interpreted
by a computer after being converted into digital signals.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

3 5WOOGT22
6 Secure socket layer (SSL) is used in the security of information on Internet websites.
(a) State how it is possible for a user to know that a website is secure by looking at the web address.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe three of the stages a web browser goes through to detect whether a website is secure.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
3 ..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... [3]
8 A bank offers an online service to its customers. The bank has developed a “SafeToUse”
systemthat asks each customer to enter four randomly chosen characters from their password each
time they log in.
The customer selects these four characters from drop-down boxes. For example:

[2]

(a) (i) Explain why it is more secure to use drop-down boxes rather than entering characters using a keyboard.
................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................
........................[2]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 340

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

(ii) Give a reason why the system asks for four characters chosen at random.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Biometrics is an additional form of security.
Give two examples of biometrics.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
10 Six security issues and six descriptions are shown below.
Draw a line to link each security issue to its correct description.[5]

Term Description

illegal access to a computer system without the owner̓s

consent or knowledge
Pharming

software that gathers information by monitoring key presses

on a user̓s keyboard; the data is sent back to the originator
Phishing of the software

malicious code installed on the hard drive of a user̓s

computer or on a web server; this code will re-direct the user
Viruses
to a fake website without the user̓s knowledge

creator of code sends out a legitimate-looking email in the

hope of gathering personal and financial information from the
Hacking recipient; it requires the user to click on the link in the email
or attachment

a message given to a web browser by a web server; it is

stored in a text file; the message is then sent back to the
Spyware
server each time the browser requests a page from the server

program or code that replicates itself; designed to amend,

Cookies delete or copy data or files on a user̓s computer; often
causes the computer to crash or run slowly

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 341

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2
5 A computer uses an 8-bit register.
The 8-bit register contains binary integers.
(a) Write the denary (base 10) value represented by:

128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) All the bits in the register are shifted one place to the right as shown below.

Write the denary number that is represented after this shift.

...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State the effect the shift to the right had on the original denary number from part (a).
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The original number in part (a) is shifted three places to the right.
(i) Show the new binary number: [1]

(ii) Write the equivalent denary number.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Describe the problems that could be caused if the original binary number in part (a) is shifted five
places to the right.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

9 (a) Explain what is meant by a denial of service attack.

...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Name and describe two other potential security threats when using the Internet.
Security threat 1 .......................................................................................................................
Description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 342

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Security threat 2 .......................................................................................................................
Description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................. [4]
3 9KPVGT2
2 Name each of the potential security issues described in the five statements below: [5]

Statement Security issue

The act of gaining unauthorised access to a
computer system ..................................................................................
Program code that can replicate itself with the
intention of deleting or corrupting files stored in
a computer ..................................................................................
A small file sent by a web server to a web
browser; every time the user visits the website,
data about user preferences is collected ..................................................................................
The act of illegally changing the source code
of a program so that it can be exploited for
another use ..................................................................................
Malicious code installed on a user’s hard drive
or a web server which redirects the user to a ..................................................................................
fake website without their knowledge
3 /CTEJ+PFKC
4 A simple symmetric encryption system is used to encrypt messages. Each letter of the alphabet is
substituted by another letter.

(a) Convert the following plain text to cypher text.

Plain text: d a t a s e c u r i t y
Cypher text: .....................................................................................................................[2]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 343

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) A new cypher text is created by shifting each letter of the alphabet five places to the right.
Show the new cypher text below.

(c) State, giving a reason, which cypher text would be more secure.

.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................. [2]
5 Give the meaning of the following terms.
HTML ..................................................................................................................................................
http .....................................................................................................................................................
https ............................................................................................................................................ [3]
9 Passwords are used to keep data safe.
Explain the differences between a text-based password and a biometric password.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................[4]

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 344

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2 7 Six security terms and six statements are listed below.
Draw a line to match the security term with the most appropriate statement. [5]
Security term Statement

Provides a secure connection between web browsers

Encryption and websites allowing secure transmission of private
data.

Secure Socket Computer that acts as an intermediary between a web

Layer (SSL) browser and the Internet.

Legitimate-looking email is sent in the hope of

Pharming gathering personal information; it requires the user to
click on a link in the email.

Uses rules and criteria, set by the user, to help protect

Phishing
a network or system from unauthorised access.

Malicious code installed on the hard drive of a user’s

Firewall computer; this code will redirect the user to a fake
website without the user’s knowledge.

Proxy server Scrambles data for secure transmission.

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 345

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2

8 A company has a number of offices around the world.

(a) Data is transmitted between the offices over the Internet. In order to keep the data safe the
company is using Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol and a firewall at each office.
Explain how SSL protocol and a firewall will keep the company’s data safe.
SSL protocol ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................
Firewall ...........................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A company stores personal details of its customers on a computer system behind a firewall.
Explain, with reasons, what else the company should do to keep this data safe.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................[6]

3 9KPVGT2
5 Raj is using the Internet to do some online shopping. He visits a website that tells him that it uses c
ookies.
(a) Explain what is meant by the term cookies.
Method 1 ............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................ [4]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 346

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) Give two examples of the use of cookies.
Example 1 ...........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
Example 2 ...........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................[2]
10 (a) Describe what is meant by Transport Layer Security (TLS).
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) Name three different applications of TLS.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................... [3]

3 9KPVGT2
7 Six statements about firewalls are shown.
Tick to show whether each statement is true or false. [6]
Statement True False
Firewalls can monitor incoming and outgoing traffic.
Firewalls operate by checking traffic against a set of rules.
Firewalls cannot block access to a certain website.
Firewalls can be software and hardware.
Firewalls can act as intermediary servers.
Firewalls can block unauthorised traffic.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 347

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) The Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol can be used to securely transmit data in online banking.
State three other different applications that use SSL.
Application 1 .....................................................................................................................
Application 2 .....................................................................................................................
Application 3 ................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Online banking is increasing in popularity.
Online banking can be a risk as it can raise a number of security issues. SSL can be used as a
security method to make online banking safer.
Identify and describe three other security methods that could be used to make online banking safer.
Security method 1 ............................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
Security method 2 ............................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
Security method 3 ...........................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [6]
Q 15) March 2018 P12 (India) 2 David has installed anti-virus software on his computer.
(a) State three tasks carried out by anti-virus software. [3]
Task 1 .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................
Task 2 ....................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................
Task 3 ....................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 348

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) David is still concerned that his computer might get infected by a computer virus.
State three other ways in which David can reduce the risk of his computer getting a computer virus.
1 ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
2 ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
3 ..............................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................[3]
Q 16) Summer 2018 P11
10 (c) When a customer enters the website, a message is displayed:
“RockICT makes use of cookies. By continuing to browse you are agreeing to our use of cookies.”Exp
lain why the music company uses cookies.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The music company is concerned about the security of its website.
The company uses a proxy server as part of its security system.
Describe the role of a proxy server in the security system.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................[4]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 349

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 17) Summer 2018 P12
12 (a) Selma has some important personal information that she needs to email to her employer. She
wants to make sure that if the personal information is intercepted, it cannot be understood.
(i) State how Selma could email her personal data more securely.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how your chosen solution works.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................. [5]
Q 19) Winter 2018 P13) 6 Sarah stores data electronically. Describe three methods that she could
use to avoid loss of stored data.
Method 1 .....................................................................................................................................
...... ..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
Method 2 .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Method 3 .................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [6]



+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 350

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 20) March 2019 P12) 7 Arya regularly uses the Internet as a research tool for her school projects.
Identify and describe three risks to Arya’s computer when she is using the Internet for research.
Risk 1 ................................................................................................................................................
Description .......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
Risk 2 ...............................................................................................................................................
Description ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
Risk 3 .............................................................................................................................................
Description ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
8 An art gallery has a website that is used to display and sell art.
(a) The gallery uses Secure Socket Layer (SSL) to provide a secure connection when selling art.
Describe the process of SSL and how it provides a secure connection.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................... [6]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 351

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) The art gallery also uses a firewall. Six statements are given about firewalls.
Tick (9) to show if the statement is True or False. [6]
True False
Statement
(9) (9)
Firewalls are only available as hardware devices
Firewalls allow a user to set rules for network traffic
Firewalls will automatically stop all malicious traffic
Firewalls only examine traffic entering a network
Firewalls encrypt all data that is transmitted around a network
Firewalls can be used to block access to certain websites
(c) The art gallery is concerned about computer ethics relating to its website.
Explain what is meant by computer ethics and why the art gallery is concerned about
computer ethics.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................ [4]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 352

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 22) Summer 2019 P12
6 Priya creates a website to sell her old comic books and superhero figures.
(b) Priya uses cookies in her website. Five statements are given about cookies.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show if the statement is True or False. [5]
Tru
False
Statement e
(‫)ض‬
(‫)ض‬
Cookies can be used to store a customer’s credit card details
Cookies can be used to track the items a customer has viewed on a website
Cookies will corrupt the data on a customer’s computer
Cookies are downloaded onto a customer’s computer
Cookies can be deleted from a customer’s computer
(e) Priya is concerned about a denial of service attack (DoS) occurring on her web server.
(i) Explain what is meant by a denial of service attack.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Give one security device that can be used to help prevent a denial of service attack.
....................................................................................................................................................... [1]
Q 23) Winter 2019 P13
1 A library has a system that allows customers to check out the books that they want to borrow.
Each book has a barcode that can be used to identify the book.
(b) The data stored by the library is archived at the end of each day. The archive is held on a server in
the library office. The data is encrypted with an 8-bit key. As some of the data is confidential, the
library wants to make the encryption more secure.
(i) State how the library could make the encryption more secure.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]



+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 353

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



(ii) The term used to describe data before it is encrypted is plain text.
State the term used to describe encrypted data.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

6 Jesse is taking his Computer Science examination. He answers five questions about ethics.
(a) For the first question, he writes the answer:
“This type of software can be copied and shared without the permission of the owner.”
State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) For the second question, he writes the answer:
“With this type of software, the owner still retains the copyright for the software, but he gives away
copies of it for free.”
State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) For the third question, he writes the answer:
“This type of software is often a trial version of the full software. To use the full version the user
normally needs to pay a fee.”
State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) For the fourth question, he writes the answer:
“This is when a person copies another person’s computer program and tries to claim it as his own.”
State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) For the fifth question, he writes the answer:
“This is the legal protection that a person can obtain, to provide protection against his work being
stolen.”
State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 354

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


8 A company discovers malware on its network.
Explain two ways that the malware could have been introduced to the company’s network.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... [4]
Q 24) Winter 2019 P12
7 Gerald uses a keyboard to enter a website address into the address bar of his browser.
(c) The website Gerald visits uses https.
Explain what is meant by https.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]
Q 25) March 20 P12
8 (b) The website owners are worried about a denial of service (DoS) attack.
Explain the term denial of service attack.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 355

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(c) The website owners are also concerned about the ethical issues of copyright and plagiarism.
(i) State what is meant by the term copyright.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what is meant by the term plagiarism.
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................... [1]
Q 26) Summer 20 P12) 3 A company collects and stores data about its customers. The data is stored
on a server in the company’s office. The data is transmitted to cloud storage to create a back-up. The
data is encrypted using symmetric encryption before it is sent to the cloud storage.
(a) Describe how the data is encrypted.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Give three other methods that can be used to secure the data in the office.
Method 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Method 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Method 3 ...................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]
5 Meena uses a browser to research information for her business.
(a) Give three functions of a browser.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................ [3]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 356

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) Meena buys products for her business using the Internet.
The Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol is used for transferring data when she buys products.
One layer of the TLS protocol is the handshake layer.
(i) Describe the purpose of the handshake layer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Identify the other layer of the TLS protocol.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Identify another protocol that can be used to transfer data securely.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Meena visits a website to buy products for her business.
The browser uses a small file to store the details of the products she views. This allows the website to
display advertisements for other products she may like.
The small file also stores her log-in details. Give the name of this type of file. .......................................
...................................................................................................... [1]
10 Uma is concerned about risks that she may encounter when using the Internet.
Two of the risks she is concerned about are phishing and pharming.
(a) Give one similarity and two differences between phishing and pharming.
Similarity ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Difference 1 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Difference 2 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [3]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 357

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) Identify two other risks that Uma could encounter when using the Internet.
Risk 1 ........................................................................................................................................
Risk 2 ........................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) Uma uses a firewall to secure the data on her computer.
(i) Uma tells her friend that a firewall can only be software-based.
Tick (‫ )ض‬to show whether Uma is Correct or Incorrect. [1]
Correct

Incorrect
(ii) Describe how the firewall helps to keep Uma’s data secure.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 358

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 27) 15a Summer 20 P11
7 Hans has a website selling comic books. Customers can create an account to buy the comic books.
Customers enter a username and password to log in to their account.
(a) Customers may worry about keylogging software being used to gain unauthorised access to their
account.
(i) Describe how keylogging software can be used to gain unauthorised access to a customer’s
account.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Identify a feature that Hans can add to the website to limit the threat of keylogging software.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Hans makes sure data transmission for his website is secure.
(i) State how customers can check that the personal details they enter into the website will be
transmitted securely.

...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how a customer’s browser checks that the website is secure.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 359

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 29) Winter 20 P13
6 Elsa writes a paragraph in an examination about encryption.
There are several terms missing from the paragraph.
Complete the paragraph using the list of given terms. Not all terms may need to be used.
Some terms may be used more than once.
• algorithm • alphanumeric • cookie • cypher
• key • padlock • plain • word processed
The data is encrypted using a ....................................................................... . This is an
................................................................ that is used to scramble the data. The data before
encryption is known as ....................................................................... text. When the data has been
encrypted it is known as ....................................................................... text. To read the encrypted
data it needs to be decrypted using a ....................................................................... . [5]
Q 30) March 21 P12
2 (c) Users can buy the high definition photographs from the website. When a user buys a high
definition photograph, a Secure Socket Layer (SSL) connection is created.
(i) Give one benefit of using an SSL connection.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain how the SSL connection is created.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 360

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


6 Hacking is one type of Internet risk used to obtain personal data that is stored on a computer.
(a) Explain how a firewall can help prevent hacking.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) Identify and describe two other types of internet risk that are used to obtain personal data.
Internet risk 1 ............................................................................................................................
Description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Internet risk 2 ............................................................................................................................
Description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [6]
18a Summer 21 P11
3 A firewall can be used to help keep the data secure that is stored on a computer.
(a) The given paragraph describes how the firewall operates to help keep the data secure.
Complete the paragraph using the most appropriate terms from the given list. Not all of the terms on
the list need to be used.
• Accept • Criteria • Hacking • Input • Network • Outgoing
• Output • Processor • Reject • Software • Store • Storage
A firewall can be ............................................ or hardware based. It monitors traffic between the
computer and the ............................................ The user sets ............................................ for the
traffic. The firewall will .............................................. or ............................................ the traffic based




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 361

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


on this. It can help prevent ............................................ and malicious software that could be a threat
to the security of the data. [6]
(b) Identify three other methods that could be used to keep the data secure.
Method 1 ...................................................................................................................................
Method 2 ...................................................................................................................................
Method 3 .................................................................................................................................. [3]

18b Summer 21 P12) 4 Three types of Internet security risk are virus, spyware and denial of service
(DoS) attack.
(a) Six statements are given about Internet security risks. [6]
Virus Spyware Denial of
Statement
(‫)ض‬ (‫)ض‬ service (‫)ض‬
captures all data entered using a keyboard
can be installed onto a web server
prevents access to a website
is malicious code on a computer
is self-replicating
damages the files on a user’s hard drive




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 362

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(b) Identify three other types of Internet security risks.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................ [3]
(c) Some Internet security risks can maliciously damage data. Data can also be damaged
accidentally. State three ways that data could be accidentally damaged.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................ [3]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 363

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


6 Cookies can be used to store a user’s personal data and online browsing habits.
(a) A cookie could be used to automatically enter a user’s payment details when the user makes a
purchase online.
Describe how cookies can be used to store and automatically enter a user’s payment details.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Explain why a user may be concerned about their personal data and online browsing habits being
stored in cookies.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 364

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



18c Summer 21 P13

4 Spencer finds out that his online music account has been accessed by an unauthorised person.
He believes his personal details for the account were obtained using phishing.
(a) Explain how the personal details could have been obtained using phishing.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Give two other Internet security risks that could have been used to obtain the personal details.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................ [2]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 365

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



7 Marco uses his computer for work. The data he uses on a daily basis is valuable to his business.
Marco is concerned about his data being accidentally damaged. Human error, such as incorrectly
removing external storage devices, is one way that the data can be accidentally damaged.
(a) Identify two other ways that data can be accidentally damaged.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Removing storage devices correctly from the computer can help prevent data being accidentally
damaged.
Give two other ways that accidental damage to data can be prevented.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... [2]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 366

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


18a Summer 21 P11
4 Two internet risks are phishing and pharming.
Describe what is meant by phishing and pharming.
Phishing ...........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Pharming ..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... [6]

Marking Scheme
 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 367

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 368

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 369

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 370

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 371

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2

3 5WOOGT22




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 372

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 373

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2

3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 374

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



10

3 /CTEJ+PFKC




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 375

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2

3 5WOOGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 376

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 377

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 378

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 379

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 /CTEJ2 +PFKC 

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 380

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2

3 5WOOGT2

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 381

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2

3 /CTEJ2

3 5WOOGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 382

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 383

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


6 ) Free software, Freeware, Shareware, Plagiarism, Copyright

3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 384

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 /CTEJ2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 385

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 386

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 387

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 C5WOOGT2


3 9KPVGT2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 388

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



3 /CTEJ2




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 389

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 390

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



Chapter 9

1.5 Computer Ethics

1.5 Computer Ethics



Have Read
To Revise

Prepared
To Read

Learning Outcome
Have

1.5: ethics
Show understanding of computer ethics, including copyright issues and
plagiarism
Distinguish between free software, freeware and shareware
Show understanding of the ethical issues raised by the spread of electronic
communication and computer systems, including hacking, cracking and
production of malware



+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 391

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Ethics is a set of moral principles that govern the behaviour of a group or individual.
Computer Ethics
Computer ethics is set of moral principles that regulate the use of computers.
Some common issues of computer ethics include:
1. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS – this covers, for example, copyright, plagiarism, cracking,
software licencing.
2. PRIVACY ISSUES – this covers, for example, hacking, data protection and malware like virus,
spyware or any illegal access to another person’s personal data
3. EFFECTS OF COMPUTERS ON SOCIETY – this covers factors such as job losses, environmental
effects, and social impacts and so on.

For example, while it is easy to duplicate copyrighted electronic (or digital) content, computer ethics
would suggest that it is wrong to do so without the author's approval. And while it may be possible to
access someone's personal information on a computer system, computer ethics would advise that such
an action is unethical.
As technology advances, computers continue to have a greater impact on society. Therefore, computer
ethics promotes the discussion of how much influence computers should have in areas such as artificial
intelligence and human communication. As the world of computers evolves, computer ethics continues
to create ethical standards that address new issues raised by new technologies.
Intellectual Property Rights:
Intellectual property (IP) is a category of property that includes intangible creations of the human
intellect.
Examples of copyrightable works include movies, videos, photos, books, diaries, articles, and
software.
Copyright is a legal concept, enacted by most governments, that grants the creator of an original work
exclusive rights to its use and distribution, usually for a limited time, with the intention of enabling the
creator of intellectual wealth (e.g. the photographer of a photograph or the author of a book) to receive
compensation for their work and be able to financially support themselves.
Copyright is a form of intellectual property (as patents, trademarks and trade secrets are), applicable
to any expressible form of an idea or information that is substantive and discrete.

%QR[TKIJV+UUWGU8GT[DTKGHN[EQR[TKIJVIKXGUVJGCWVJQTQHCYQTMVJGTKIJV

x ...to reproduce the work.

x ...to permit copies to be made by others.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 392

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


x ...to prepare derivative works.
x ...to display the copyrighted work publicly.
Plagiarism is the practice of taking someone else's work or ideas and passing them off as one's own.
“Plagiarism is the deliberate or reckless representation of another’s words, thoughts, or ideas as one’s
own without attribution in connection with submission of academic work, whether graded or otherwise.”
Plagiarism is considered academic dishonesty and a breach of Computer ethics. It is subject to
sanctions like expulsion.
Plagiarism is not a crime per se but in academia and industry it is a serious ethical offense, and cases
of plagiarism can constitute copyright infringement.
Cracking
Software cracking is the modification of software to remove or disable features which are
considered undesirable by the person cracking the software, usually related to break license.

Software Licencing:
Following are types of software licence:
Freeware is copyrighted computer software which is made available for use free of charge, for an
unlimited time. Authors of freeware often want to "give something to the community", but also want to
retain control of any future development of the software.
The term shareware refers to commercial software that is copyrighted, but which may be copied for
others for the purpose of their trying it out with the understanding that they will pay for it if they continue
to use it.
Free software is computer software that is distributed along with its source code, and is released under
terms that guarantee users the freedom to study, adapt/modify, and distribute the software.
Free Software Freeware Shareware

Without any copyright With copyright With copyright

With source code Without source code Without source

Free for lifetime Free for lifetime Free for trial period




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 393

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


ACM/IEEE Code of Ethics
1. PUBLIC – Software engineers shall act consistently with the public interest.
2. CLIENT AND EMPLOYER – Software engineers shall act in a manner that is in the best interests
of their client and employer, consistent with the public interest.
3. PRODUCT – Software engineers shall ensure that their products and related modifications meet
the highest professional standards possible.
4. JUDGEMENT – Software engineers shall maintain integrity and independence in their
professional judgment.
5. MANAGEMENT – Software engineering managers and leaders shall subscribe to and promote an
ethical approach to the management of software development and maintenance.
6. PROFESSION – Software engineers shall advance the integrity and reputation of the profession
consistent with the public interest.
7. COLLEAGUES – Software engineers shall be fair to and supportive of their colleagues.
8. SELF – Software engineers shall participate in lifelong learning regarding the practice of their
profession and shall promote an ethical approach to the practice of the profession.
Exam-style Questions

1 The ACM and IEEE set out eight principles for ethics and professional practice. The categories, with
a short explanation, are shown in this diagram.




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 394

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Statement 1: Team leaders should subscribe to and promote an ethical approach to the management
of software development and maintenance.
Statement 2: Software engineers shall participate in lifelong learning regarding the practice of the
profession.
Statement 3: Software and related modifications meet the highest possible standards.
a) These three statements need to be added to the diagram. Circle the correct numbers on the diagra
m to indicate the positions for Statement 1, Statement 2 and Statement 3. [2]
b For each of these three workplace scenarios, unethical behaviour is demonstrated. Explain the
principle(s) which are not being met.

I Workplace scenario 1
A large project is devolved to project teams, each led by a project leader. One project leader fails to
inform his manager that he has major concerns that:
x their team's software contribution is taking much longer to write and test than anticipated
x they are consequently at risk of spending over their allocated budget. [3]

...............................................
...................................................................................................

Ii Workplace scenario 2
The software house is about to train a number of programmers in a new programming language. Two
employees are refusing to attend the training. [2]
...............................................
...................................................................................................
Iii The company is developing some monitoring software which requires sensors placed in a nature
reserve.
One employee considers the sensors will be a danger to some of the wildlife, but is told by his
manager that the matter is none of his concern. [2]
...............................................
...................................................................................................

2 A team of software engineers is developing a new e-commerce program for a client. State three of
the principles of the ACM/IEEE Software Engineering Code of Ethics. Illustrate each one, with an
example, describing how it will influence their working practices.
1 .................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................
2 .............................................................................................................. ...............................................
...................................................................
3 ............................................................................................................ .................................................
............................................................. [6]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 395

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 Bobby is a senior programmer at a software house which produces intruder detection software. He
also runs his own software company which develops and sells various computer applications.
The following table shows seven activities which Bobby carries out.
Put a tick (‫ )ݱ‬in the appropriate column to identify if the activity is ethical or unethical. [7]
Activity Ethical Unethical
Gives away passwords used in the intruder detection
software
Uses source code developed at the software house for
the software he develops for his own company
Insists that staff work to deadlines
Turns down training opportunities offered by his
employer
Writes and sells software that reads confidential data
from client computers
Fakes test results of safety-critical software
Has the software applications developed overseas for
sale in his own country




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 396

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL



Candidate Example Response




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 397

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 398

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL






+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 399

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


6QRKECN2CUV2CRGTU
3 9KPVGT2
4 (a) Computer ethics involves a number of different topics.
(i) A student made the following statement on an examination paper:
“It allows a user to have the freedom to run, copy, change and adapt the software and then pass it on
to a colleague, friend or family member.”
Identify which computer term the student was describing.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain what is meant by computer ethics.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

3 9KPVGT2

13 Identify which five computer terms are being described below.

(a) A system designed to prevent unauthorised access to or from a private network or intranet; it
examines all data traffic to and from the network and filters out anything that does not meet certain
criteria.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Software that can be used on a trial basis before buying the full version; it often does not include
all the features of the full version or has a time limit before it stops working.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A protocol for transmitting private documents via the Internet; it uses two keys to encrypt the data
– a public key and a private key.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A standard adopted by the electronic music industry for controlling devices that produce music,
such as synthesisers and sound cards.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) A device that allows audio signals to be converted into electrical signals which can be interpreted
by a computer after being converted into digital signals.



+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 400

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL

............................................................................................................................................... [1]
ExaminersĜ Comments Question 13(a) (b) (c) (d) and (e)
Many candidates were able to gain at least two or three marks in this section. Some confused shareware for freeware or free software,
demonstrating they were unsure of their knowledge in this area.
3 5WOOGT22
1 Some software can be described as free, freeware or shareware.
Tick (‫ )ض‬the appropriate boxes in the table below to show which features apply to these three types of
software. [3]
Software feature Free Freeware Shareware
Software source code can be freely accessed and
modified as required
All the features of the full version of the software are
not made available; the full version needs to be
purchased first
The original software is subject to all copyright laws
It is possible to distribute modified versions or
copies of the software to friends and family
3 5WOOGT2
8 (a) Five statements and three types of software are shown below.
Draw lines to connect each statement with the correct type of software. [3]

Statement Type of
Users have the freedom to pass on the software
to friends and family as they wish.

Users can download this software free of

charge, but they cannot modify the source code Free software
in any way.

Users are allowed to try out the software for a

trial period only before being charged. Freeware

Users can study the software source code and

modify it, where necessary, to meet their own
Shareware
needs, without breaking copyright laws.

Users can obtain a free trial version of the

software, but this often does not contain all the
features of the full version.

+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 401

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Describe three ethical issues that should be considered when using computers.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
3 .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]

3 9KPVGT2 12 Explain the differences between freeware and free software.

..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]

3   9KPVGT  2   11 Explain why ethics are important when using computers.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[6]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 402

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


Q 8) Winter 2017 P12

11 Complete the paragraphs choosing the correct five terms from the list. Each term can only be used
once:
• Ethics • Freeware • Free Software
• Hacking • Malware • Plagiarism
• Shareware • Virus
Taking another person’s work from the Internet and claiming it as your own is
called............................................. . It is possible to protect your work online with copyright. One
product that people may want to protect is software. ............................................. does allow a person
to share, copy and change software freely, but ............................................. does not allow a person
to do this legally. Software that has a licence allowing free use for a trial period is
called ............................................ . The name given to this area of Computer Science
is............................................. . [5]

3 /CTEJ2 +PFKC 

1 Some types of software can be described as free software or freeware.
Draw lines to link each description to a correct type of software. A description can be linked to more
than one type of software. [2]

Description Type of software

Free to download

Free software

Code can be modified

and redistributed

Freeware

Subject to copyright
legislation




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 403

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2
8 (c) The art gallery is concerned about computer ethics relating to its website.
Explain what is meant by computer ethics and why the art gallery is concerned about
computer ethics.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................ [4]

3 9KPVGT2
6 Jesse is taking his Computer Science examination. He answers five questions about ethics.
(a) For the first question, he writes the answer: “This type of software can be copied and shared
without the permission of the owner.” State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) For the second question, he writes the answer: “With this type of software, the owner still retains
the copyright for the software, but he gives away copies of it for free.”
State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) For the third question, he writes the answer: “This type of software is often a trial version of the full
software. To use the full version the user normally needs to pay a fee.”
State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) For the fourth question, he writes the answer: “This is when a person copies another person’s
computer program and tries to claim it as his own.”
State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 404

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(e) For the fifth question, he writes the answer:
“This is the legal protection that a person can obtain, to provide protection against his work being
stolen.”
State what Jesse is describing.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]

3 /CTEJ2

8 A student website provides research support and software downloads.

(c) The website owners are also concerned about the ethical issues of copyright and plagiarism.
(i) State what is meant by the term copyright.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what is meant by the term plagiarism.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

3 /CTEJ2
7 Adeel has used a high-level language to program a mobile application.
(c) Adeel is considering distributing his application as free software or shareware.
Explain the difference between free software and shareware.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]

(d) Adeel is concerned about his application being plagiarised. Define the term plagiarism.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 405

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


(e) Adeel copyrights his application. State why Adeel copyrights his application.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Marking Scheme
3 9KPVGT2

3 9KPVGT2
3 5WOOGT22

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 406

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 5WOOGT2

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 407

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2

3 9KPVGT2

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 408

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 9KPVGT2

3 /CTEJ2 +PFKC 

3 5WOOGT2

3 9KPVGT2

3 /CTEJ2

 




+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/

 PAGE 409

COMPUTER SCIENCE WITH INQILAB PATEL


3 /CTEJ2







+92 300 2724734 /inqilabpatel https://www.inqilabpatel.com/